ECE-R20

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 221

Dept.

of Electronics and Communication Engineering

MADANAPALLE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE


MADANAPALLE
(UGC-AUTONOMOUS)
www.mits.ac.in

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE STRUCTURE
&
DETAILED SYLLABI
For the students admitted to
B. Tech in Electronics and Communication Engineering Academic year 2020-21 Batches
onwards
and
B. Tech. Lateral Entry Scheme from the academic year 2021-22

B. Tech Regular Four Year U. G. Degree Course


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

MADANAPALLE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY &


SCIENCE, MADANAPALLE

B. Tech Four Year Curriculum Structure


Branch: ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
Total 160 Credits for 2020(Regular) & 121 Credits for 2021(Lateral Entry) Admitted Batch
Credits 163 Credits for 2021(Regular) & 124 Credits 2022(Lateral Entry) Admitted Batch onwards

I. Induction Program and Holistic Development Activities

Sl.No Title Duration

Three weeks’ duration at


1 Induction Program
the start of First Year
(Mandatory)
(Refer Annexure - I)

Holistic Development Activities Three hours per week


2
(Every Student from Semester 2 – 8 should (Activity list is enclosed in
register for at least one activity) Annexure - I)
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

R20 - Curriculum Structure


I Year I Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total

1 HSMC 20ENG101 Professional English 3 0 0 3 3

2 BSC 20MAT101 Engineering Calculus 3 1 0 4 4

3 BSC 20CHE101 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3 3

4 ESC 20ME101 Engineering Graphics 2 0 2 4 3


ESC 20CSE101 Programming for Problem Solving 2 0 3 5 1.5
5
(Python)
6 BSC 20CHE201 Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5

7 ESC 20ME201 Workshop Practice 0 0 3 3 1.5

Total 13 1 11 25 19.5

I Year II Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total

1 Linear Algebra, Complex Variables and 3 0 0 3 3


BSC 20MAT107 Ordinary Differential Equations
2 BSC 20PHY102 Applied Physics 3 1 0 4 4
3 ESC 20EEE101 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 1 0 4 4
4 ESC 20CSE102 C Programming and Data Structures 3 0 0 3 3
English for Professional Purposes 0 0 2 2 1
5 HSMC 20ENG201
Laboratory
6 BSC 20PHY201 Physics Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 ESC 20EEE201 Electrical Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
C Programming and Data Structures 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 ESC 20CSE201
Laboratory
Total 12 2 11 25 19.5

(L = Lecture, T = Tutorial, P = Practical)


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

II Year I Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total
HSMC 20HUM101 Economics and Financial Accounting 3 0 0 3 3
1
for Engineers
BSC 20MAT113 Transforms and Partial Differential 3 0 0 3 3
2
Equations
3 ESC 20ECE101 Network Theory 2 1 0 3 3
4 PCC 20ECE102 Digital System Design 2 1 0 3 3
5 PCC 20ECE103 Electronic Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3 3
6 PCC 20ECE201 Networks and Simulation Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 PCC 20ECE202 Digital System Design Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
PCC 20ECE203 Electronic Devices and Circuits 0 0 3 3 1.5
8
Laboratory
SC Skill Oriented Course -I 1 0 2 3 2
9
( Refer ANNEXURE IV)
10 MC 20HUM901 Indian Constitution 2 0 0 2 0
Total 16 2 11 29 21.5

II Year II Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total
BSC 20MAT109 Probability Theory and Stochastic 3 0 0 3 3
1
Process
2 PCC 20ECE104 Control Systems Engineering 2 1 0 3 3
3 PCC 20ECE105 Principles of Signals and Systems 2 1 0 3 3
4 PCC 20ECE106 Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3 3
5 PCC 20ECE107 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3 3
6 PCC 20ECE204 Simulation and Control Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 PCC 20ECE205 Analog Circuits Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
PCC 20ECE206 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 0 0 3 3 1.5
8
Laboratory
SC Skill Oriented Course -II 1 0 2 3 2
9
( Refer ANNEXURE IV)
10 MC 20CHE901 Environmental Science 2 0 0 2 0
Total 16 2 11 29 21.5

(L = Lecture, T = Tutorial, P = Practical)


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

III Year I Semester


S. Hours Per Week
Category Course Code Course Title Credits
No. L T P Total
Electromagnetic Fields and 2 1 0 3 3
1 PCC 20ECE108
Transmission Lines
2 PCC 20ECE109 Analog Communication 3 0 0 3 3
3 PCC 20ECE110 Digital Signal Processing 2 1 0 3 3
4 OE Open Elective-I 3 0 0 3 3
PE Professional Elective-I 3 0 0 3 3
Analog Communication 0 0 3 3 1.5
6 PCC 20ECE207
Laboratory
Digital Signal Processing 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 PCC 20ECE208
Laboratory
Skill Oriented Course -III 1 0 2 3 2
8 SC
( Refer ANNEXURE IV)
20HUM902**/
9 MC Universal Human Values 2/3 0 0 2/3 0/3
20HUM102#
10 PROJ 20ECE701 Summer Internship-1* 0 0 3 3 1.5
Total 16/17 2 11 29/30 21.5/24.5
** 20HUM902 Universal Human Values is offered as non-credit mandatory course for
2020 (Regular) & 2021 (Lateral Entry) Admitted Batch
# 20HUM102 Universal Human Values is offered as three credit course for 2021 (Regular)
& 2022(Lateral Entry) Admitted Batch onwards
* 2 Months internship during 2nd year summer vacation and to be evaluated in III Year I Semester
III Year II Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total
1 PCC 20ECE111 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 3
2 PCC 20ECE112 Antenna and Microwave Engineering 3 0 0 3 3
3 PCC 20ECE113 Digital Communication 3 0 0 3 3
4 OE Open Elective-II 3 0 0 3 3
Professional Elective-II
5 PE 3 0 0 3 3
(MOOCS)
6 PCC 20ECE209 VLSI Design Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 PCC 20ECE210 Microwave Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 PCC 20ECE211 Digital Communication Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
Skill Oriented Course-IV
9 SC 1 0 2 3 2
( Refer ANNEXURE IV)
10 MC 20CE901 Disaster Management 2 0 0 2 0
Total 18 0 11 29 21.5

(L = Lecture, T = Tutorial, P = Practical)


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Tentative Structure from IVth Year onwards


IV Year I Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total

1 PE Professional Elective-III 3 0 0 3 3
2 PE Professional Elective-IV 3 0 0 3 3
3 PE Professional Elective-V 3 0 0 3 3
Open Elective-III
4 OE 3 0 0 3 3
(MOOCS)
5 OE Open Elective-IV 3 0 0 3 3
OE- Open Elective-V (Taken from
6 3 0 0 3 3
HSMC Humanities & Social Science)
Skill Oriented Course -V
7 SC 1 0 2 3 2
( Refer ANNEXURE IV)
8 PROJ 20ECE702 Summer Internship-2* 0 0 6 6 3
Total 19 0 8 27 23
* 2 Months’ internship during 3 year summer vacation and to be evaluated in IV Year I Semester
nd

IV Year II Semester
S. Course Hours Per Week
Category Course Title Credits
No. Code L T P Total
Project Work, Seminar and Internship in
1 PROJ 20ECE703 0 0 24 24 12
Industry (6 months)
Total 0 0 24 24 12

(L = Lecture, T = Tutorial, P = Practical)


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

ANNEXURE - I

THREE WEEK MANDATORY INDUCTION PROGRAMME

 Yoga and Meditation


 Sports and Games
 NSS
 NCC
 MITS Social Responsibility Club
 Management module
 Design Thinking
 Spoken and Written Communication

 Proficiency modules

 Basic Computer Proficiency


 Interpersonal skills
 Computer Graphics
 Web programming
 Mobile Apps
 Vocabulary enhancement

HOLISTIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES

Description of Activities

1. Physical and Health


2. Culture
3. Literature and Media
4. Social Service
5. Self-Development
6. Nature and Environment
7. Innovation
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

ANNEXURE - II

OPEN ELECTIVE – I

(To be offered under MOOC’s Category from SWAYAM – NPTEL)


Sl. Course Offered by
Course Code Course Title Department of
No.
1 20HUM3M01 Project Management for Managers Management
Studies
2 20HUM3M02 Ethics in Engineering Practice Management
Studies
3 20CE3M01 Integrated Waste Management for Smart City Civil

4 20CE3M02 Soil and Water Conservation Engineering Civil

5 20CE3M03 Plastic Waste Management Civil

6 20ME3M01 Introduction to Industry 4.0 and Industrial Mechanical


Internet of Things
7 20ME3M02 Operations Research Mechanical
8 20ME3M03 Design Thinking and Innovation Mechanical
9 20EEE3M01 Non-Conventional Energy Sources EEE

10 20EEE3M02 Design of Photovoltaic Systems EEE

10 20CSE3M01 Online Privacy CSE

11 20CSE3M02 Privacy and Security in Online Social Media CSE

12 20CSE3M03 Social Networks CSE

13 20IE3M01 Intellectual Property Rights and Competition Multidisciplinary


Law
14 20IE3M02 Introduction to Research Multidisciplinary

Any new Interdisciplinary Course offered by SWAYAM NPTEL can be appended in future.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – II
(To be offered under Conventional Mode)
Course Offered by
S.No Course Code Course Title
Department of
1 20MAT301 Advanced Numerical Methods Mathematics
2 20MAT302 Engineering Optimization Mathematics
3 20PHY301 Optical Physics and its Applications Physics
Physics
LASER Physics and Advanced LASER
4 20PHY302
Technology
5 20CHE301 Introduction to Petroleum Industry Chemistry

Green Chemistry and Catalysis for


6 20CHE302 Chemistry
Sustainable Environment
7 20CE301 Ground Improvement Techniques Civil
8 20CE302 Environmental Impact Assessment Civil
9 20CE303 Watershed Management Civil
10 20ME301 Material Science for Engineers Mechanical
11 20ME302 Elements of Mechanical Engineering Mechanical
12 20EEE301 Industrial Electrical Systems EEE
13 20EEE302 Introduction to MEMS EEE
14 20CST301 Operating Systems CST
15 20CSE301 JAVA Programming CSE
16 20CSE302 Multimedia Technologies CSE

Any new Interdisciplinary Course offered can be appended in future


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – III

(To be offered under MOOC’s Category from SWAYAM – NPTEL)

Course Offered by
S.No Course Code Course Title Department of
1 20CE3M04 Remote Sensing and GIS Civil
2 20CE3M05 Waste Water Treatment and Recycling Civil
3 20ME3M04 Power Plant Engineering Mechanical
4 20ME3M05 Mechatronics and Manufacturing Automation Mechanical
5 20EEE3M03 Introduction to Smart Grid EEE
6 20CSE3M04 Software Project Management CSE
7 20CSE3M05 Software Testing CSE

8 Multi-Core Computer Architecture – Storage


20CSE3M06 CSE
and Interconnects

Any new Interdisciplinary Course offered by SWAYAM NPTEL can be appended in future.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – IV

(To be offered under Conventional Mode)

S.No Course Code Course Title Course Offered by


Department of
1 20MAT303 Mathematics
Graph Theory
2 Mathematical Modelling and Numerical
20MAT304 Mathematics
Simulation
3 20PHY303 Thin Film Technology and its Applications Physics

4
20CHE303 Introduction to Nano Science and Technology Chemistry

5 Computational Methods in Materials Science


20CHE304 Chemistry
and Engineering

6
20CE304 Green Building and Energy Conservation Civil

7
20CE305 Environmental Engineering Civil

8 20ME303 Internet of Manufacturing Things Mechanical


9 20ME304 Total Quality Management Mechanical
10 20ME305 Entrepreneurship Mechanical
11 20EEE303 Robotics EEE
12 20EEE304 Electrical Safety EEE
13 20CSE304 Mobile Application Development CSE
14 20CSE305 Distributed and Cloud Computing CSE
Any new Interdisciplinary Course offered can be appended in future
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – V (HUMANITIES)


(To be offered under Conventional Mode)

Sl. Course Offered by


Course Code Course Title
No. Department of

1 20HUM301 Principles of Management Humanities

2 20HUM302 Human Resource Development Humanities


3 20HUM303 Soft Skills Humanities
4 20HUM304 National Cadet Crops Humanities
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

ANNEXURE - III

List of Professional Elective – ECE

Professional Elective – I
Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ECE401 Nano Electronics
2. 20ECE402 Electronics Packaging and Testing
3. 20ECE403 Bio-Medical Electronics
4. 20ECE404 Internet of Things
5. 20ECE405 Embedded Systems
6. 20ECE406 Advanced Digital System Design using Verilog HDL
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.

Professional Elective – II
(To be offered under MOOC’s Category from SWAYAM – NPTEL)

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title


1. 20ECE4M01 Foundations of Cryptography
2. 20ECE4M02 Semiconductor Opto-Electronics
3. 20ECE4M03 Computer Networks and Internet Protocol
4. 20ECE4M04 Computer Architecture
5. 20ECE4M05 Computer Architecture and Organization
Any other new Disciplinary Course which doesn’t exist in the Curriculum can be appended in
future.

Professional Elective – III


Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ECE407 Fiber Optic Communication
2. 20ECE408 Software for Embedded systems
3. 20ECE409 Wireless Communication
4. 20ECE410 FPGA based System Design
5. 20ECE411 Pattern Recognition and its Applications
6. 20ECE412 Cognitive Radio
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – IV
Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ECE413 Information Theory and Coding
2. 20ECE414 Mobile Communication Networks
3. 20ECE415 RADAR Engineering
4. 20ECE416 Speech and Audio Processing
5. 20ECE417 DSP Architecture
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.

Professional Elective –V
Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1 20ECE418 Digital Image and Video Processing
2 20ECE419 Introduction to MEMS
3 20ECE420 Satellite Communication
4 20ECE421 Error Correcting Codes
5 20ECE422 RFICs
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

ANNEXURE - IV

List of Skill Oriented Courses

Skill Oriented Course – I


Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ENG601 Corporate Communication
Any Courses in Communication Skills can be appended in future.

Skill Oriented Course – II


Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ECE601 Python for Data Science
2. 20ECE602 Sensors and Instrumentation
4. 20ECE603 MATLAB for Engineers
Any Courses can be appended in future.

Skill Oriented Course – III

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title


1. 20ECE604 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Designing
2. 20ECE605 Artificial Intelligence Foundations
3. 20ECE606 Object Oriented Programming using C++
Any Courses can be appended in future.

Skill Oriented Course – IV


Laboratory
Laboratory
Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ECE607 Real Time Operating Systems (RTOS)
2. 20ECE608 Internet of Things
Any Courses can be appended in future.

Skill Oriented Course – V


Sl. No. Course Code Course Title
1. 20ECE609 Digital Signal Processor
2. 20ECE610 Computer Networks
3. 20ECE611 Antenna Design
Any Courses can be appended in future.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Annexure V

Minor in Electronics and Communication Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ME, CSE, CST , CS – AI, CS – DS, CS – CSY and CSE - IOT)

Stream Name: Communication Systems (CS)

Hours Per Week


SI.No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Electronics Engineering: Basic


Professional
20MDECE101 Principles and Applications
Core Course
(Except EEE Branch)
1 3 0 0 3 3
Professional Computer Communication
20MDECE102
Core Course Networks(for EEE Branch)

Professional Analog and Digital


2 20MDECE103 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course Communications

III Year II Semester

Professional
3 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course 20MDECE104 Satellite Communication

Professional
4 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course 20MDECE105 Optical Communication

Professional Analog and Digital


5 20MDECE201 0 0 4 4 2
Core Course Communications Lab

IV Year I Semester

Professional Mobile Telecommunication


6 20MDECE106 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course Networks

Professional
7 20MDECE107 DSP Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course

Total 18 0 4 22 20
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor in Electronics & Communication Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ME, CSE, CST , CS – AI, CS – DS, CS – CSY and CSE - IOT)
Stream Name: Embedded Systems (ES)

Hours Per Week


SI.No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Electronics Engineering: Basic


Professional
20MDECE101 Principles and Applications
Core Course
( Except EEE Branch)
1 3 0 0 3 3
Professional Computer Architecture (For
20MDECE108
Core Course EEE Branch)

Professional
2 20MDECE109 Advanced Microprocessors 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course

III Year II Semester

Professional Microcontroller Programming


3 20MDECE110 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course with TI- MSP 430

Professional ARM – System on Chip


4 20MDECE111 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course Architecture

Professional Microprocessor and


5 20MDECE202 0 0 4 4 2
Core Course Microcontroller Laboratory

IV Year I Semester

Professional
6 20MDECE112 Real Time Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course

Professional Testing of Digital VLSI


7 20MDECE113 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course Circuits

Total 18 0 4 22 20
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Annexure VI
Honors in Electronics & Communication Engineering

Hours Per Week


SI.No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

1 20HDECE101 Neural Networks and Fuzzy 3 0 0 3 3


Professional Logic
Elective
2 Course 20HDECE102 Testing of Digital VLSI Circuits 3 0 0 3 3
(Choose any
two from
three courses)
3 20HDECE103 Real Time Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 3

Sub Total 6 0 0 6 6
III Year II Semester

4 20HDECE104 Advanced Digital Signal 3 0 0 3 3


Professional Processing
Elective
5 Course 20HDECE105 System on Chip Design 3 0 0 3 3
(Choose any
two from
three courses)
6 20HDECE106 VLSI Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 3

Sub Total 6 0 0 6 6
IV Year I Semester

7 20HDECE107 Advanced Communication 3 0 0 3 3


Professional Networks
Elective
8 Course 20HDECE108 CAD for VLSI Circuits 3 0 0 3 3
(Choose any
two from
three courses)
9 20HDECE109 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 3

Community Radio –
10 SOC 20HDECE601 Transmission System and 1 0 2 3 2
Technology
Sub Total 7 0 2 9 8
Total 19 0 2 21 20
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

I YEAR I SEMESTER
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20ENG101 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
Communication takes place in many forms, however the major impact and effectiveness is in its
professionalism. This course defines, enlightens and enables learners to engage in Professional
Communication by addressing all the areas of communication – Listening, Speaking, Reading and
Writing. This course also deals with various types of communication – Verbal, Non-verbal,
Storytelling, Crucial Conversations, Written Communication, Vocalics, Eye Contact, Posture, etc.

Course Objectives: This course enables the student to –


1. Engage effectively in a professional environment
2. Understand the intricacies and implications of professional communication
3. Use linguistic skills in any given context
4. Conduct self in a learning environment
5. Be better prepared for employment
UNIT I GRAMMAR & VOCABULARY 9 hours

Grammar - Tense, Reported Speech, Modals, Conditionals; Vocabulary development - prefixes,


suffixes, compound words, synonyms & antonyms.

UNIT II READING SKILLS & WRITTEN COMMUNICATION 9 hours


Reading - short comprehension passages, practice in skimming, scanning and predicting; Writing-
completing sentences, developing hints; Paragraph writing- topic sentence, main ideas, coherence.

UNIT III VERBAL & NON-VERBAL ASPECTS 9 hours


Verbal - Introducing oneself, exchanging personal information, Using ‘Wh’- Questions, asking and
answering, yes or no questions- asking about routine actions and expressing opinions; Non-Verbal –
Use of body language, combating nervousness.

UNIT IV CONVERSATIONS 9 hours


Listening-short texts & conversing, formal and informal conversations, short group conversations,
speaking about oneself, sharing information of a personal kind speaking about one’s friend.

UNIT V BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT & ETIQUETTES 9 hours


Greeting & taking leave; Writing e-mails, memos, reports, etc.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Read articles and understand professional communication
2. Participate effectively in informal conversations
3. Introduce themselves and their friends and express opinions in English
4. Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
5. Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. Guy Brook Hart & Norman Whitby; Cambridge English-Business Benchmark: Pre-Intermediate
to Intermediate; Published by: Cambridge University Press.
2. Adrian Doff, Craig Thaine, Herbert Puchta, et al; Empower: Intermediate (B1+); Published by:
Cambridge University Press.

Reference Books:
1. AJ Thomson & AV Martinet; A Practical English Grammar; Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Raymond Murphy; English Grammar in Use with CD; Cambridge University Press, 2013.
3. K.S. Yadurajan; Modern English Grammar; Oxford University Press, 2014.
4. William Strunk Jr; The Elements of Style; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY, 2006
5. Joseph Devlin; How to Speak and Write Correctly; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY, 2006
6. Anjana Agarwal; Powerful Vocabulary Builder; New Age Publishers, 2011.
7. Writing Tutor; Advanced English Learners’ Dictionary; Oxford University Press, 2012.
8. http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
9. https://www.rong-chang.com/
10. https://www.rong-chang.com/

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20MAT101 ENGINEERING CALCULUS
L T P C
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Mathematics at Intermediate or Equivalent Level

Course Description:
Communication takes place in many forms, however the major impact and effectiveness is in its
professionalism. This course defines, enlightens and enables learners to engage in Professional
Communication by addressing all the areas of communication – Listening, Speaking, Reading and
Writing. This course also deals with various types of communication – Verbal, Non-verbal,
Storytelling, Crucial Conversations, Written Communication, Vocalics, Eye Contact, Posture, etc.

Course Objectives: This course enables the student to –


1. To introduce the basic concepts of definite integrals, improper integrals, Beta and Gamma
functions.
2. To acquire knowledge on mean value theorems in calculus.
3. To illustrate various techniques of testing the convergence of infinite series and introduces the
functions of sine and cosine series.
4. To familiarize the knowledge of limit, continuity and the derivatives, extreme values in
Multivariable.
5. To emphasize the role of Double and Triple integrals in dealing with area and volume of the
regions.

UNIT I INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12 hours


Definite integrals; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate area and length of curves, surface areas
and volumes of revolutions; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties.

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12 hours


Rolle’s Theorem, Mean value theorems, Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders (without
proofs); indeterminate forms, Maxima and minima.

UNIT III SEQUENCE AND SERIES 12 hours


Sequence and Series, their Convergence and tests for convergence; Power series, Taylor's series, Series for
exponential, trigonometric and logarithmic functions; Fourier series: Half range sine and cosine series,
Parseval’s theorem.

UNIT IV MULTIVARIABLE DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12 hours


Limit, continuity and partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total derivative; Tangent plane and normal line;
Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers.

UNIT V MULTIVARIABLE INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12 hours


Multiple Integration: double integrals (Cartesian and polar), change of order of integration in double integrals,
Change of variables (Cartesian to polar), Applications: areas and volumes (double integration), triple integrals,
gradient, curl and divergence, Green’s, Stokes and Gauss divergence theorems (without proofs).

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Evaluate the definite integrals, Beta and Gamma functions and calculate length of curve and
underlying area.
2. Relate the results of mean value theorems in calculus to Engineering problems.
3. Use the Power series and Fourier series for ascertaining the stability and convergence of various
techniques.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

4. Apply the functions of several variables to evaluate the rates of change with respect to time and
space variables in engineering.
5. Compute the area and volume by interlinking them to appropriate double and triple integrals.

Text Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 42th Edition, 2012.
2. G. B. Thomas, Maurice D. Weir, Joel Hass, Frank R. Giordano, Thomas’ Calculus Pearson education 11th
Edition, 2004.

Reference Books:
1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson, Reprint, 2002.
2 Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
3 Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
4 Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 11th Reprint, 2010.
5 D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.
6 N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications, Reprint, 2008.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20CHE101 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description:
Deals with the basic principles of various branches of chemistry like physical, organic, inorganic,
analytical and nanomaterial chemistry.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. Understand, analyse and determine the impurities present in the water.
2. Appreciate the synthetic organic reactions used in daily life
3. Learn the principles of spectroscopies to analyse them.
4. Value the basic concepts of thermodynamics and electrochemistry.
5. Be exposed to the importance of nano and engineering materials used in their daily life and industry

UNIT I IMPURITIES PRESENT IN WATER AND WATER 9 hours


TREATMENT
Impurities present in Water: Impurities in water (BIS and WHO standards), Hardness of water-
determination of hardness - EDTA Method (numerical problems), Alkalinity of water (numerical
problems), Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen by Winkler’s method and its importance and Chlorides.
Disadvantages (industry level) of using hard water (Boiler corrosion, Caustic embrittlement, Scale and
Sludges). Softening of water (Ion exchange method), Treatment of brackish water by Reverse Osmosis
method. Water treatment for civic applications: coagulation, sedimentation, filtration, sterilization -
chlorination and ozonation. Concept of break point chlorination.

UNIT II PERIODIC PROPERTIES AND ORGANIC REACTIONS 7 hours


Periodic properties: Electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies, oxidation
states, molecular geometries. Organic Reactions: Introduction to substitution (SN1 and SN2 ),
elimination (E1 and E2) - Addition, Condensation and Free Radical Polymerization Reaction (only the
mechanism).

UNIT III SPECTROSCOPY 8 hours


Basic Principle and Applications of UV-Visible, FT-IR, Raman, Microwave and Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance (NMR) Spectroscopy

UNIT IV THERMODYNAMICS AND ELECTROCHEMISTRY 11 hours


Thermodynamics: Systems, State Functions, Thermodynamic Functions: Work, Energy, Entropy and
Free energy. Estimations of Entropy in Isothermal, Isobaric and Isochoric processes. Electrochemistry:
Free energy and EMF. Cell potentials, the Nernst equation and applications. Batteries (Lead-Acid and
Lithium ion) and Fuel-Cells (H2-O2).

UNIT V ENGINEERING MATERIALS, NANOSCIENCE & 10 hours


NANOTECHNOLOGY
Engineering Materials: Cement Materials and Manufacturing Process. Reactions in setting and
hardening of Cement. Lubricants – definition, Properties of lubricants – Viscosity, Viscosity Index,
Flash Point and Pour Point. Nanomaterials: Introduction, Classes/Types, Chemical synthesis of
Nanomaterials: Chemical Vapor Deposition method (Carbon Nanotubes), Characterization by powder
XRD (Scherrer’s equation). Applications of Nanomaterials: Solar Energy and Photocatalytic Dye
Degradation (TiO2).
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Analyse and determine the impurities in water such as hardness, alkalinity for sustainable
development.
2. Prepare organic compounds/polymers for environmental, safety and society need.
3. Comprehend the principles and applications of spectroscopies.
4. Apply the concept of free energy in thermodynamics, electrochemistry for solving the problems
evolve in the engineering processes.
5. Acquire spotlight to the nanomaterials and basic engineering materials used in academics, industry,
and daily life.
Text Books:
P. W. Atkins & Julio de Paula, ‘The Elements of Physical Chemistry’, Ninth edition (Oxford
1.
University Press, Oxford 2010)
C. N. Banwell, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, Fourth Edition, (Tata McGraw Hill,
2.
2008).
C. N. Banwell, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, Fourth Edition, (Tata McGraw Hill,
3.
2008).
Dr. S. S. Dara and Dr. S. S. Umare, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry,1 st Edition., (S. Chand
4.
& Company Ltd, 2000).
T. Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, 1 st Edition, (Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
5.
2017).

Reference Books
1. ‘Physical Chemistry’, D. W. Ball, First Edition, India Edition (Thomson, 2007).
2. Perry’s Chemical Engineers’ Handbook, Don W. Green and Marylee Z. Southard, 9th Edition
(McGraw Hill, 2018).
3. Engineering Chemistry, Dr. Suba Ramesh and others, 1st Edition (Wiley India, 2011).
4. Jain and Jain, Engineering Chemistry,16th Edition (Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) Ltd,
2016).
5. Amretashis Sengupta, Chandan Kumar Sarkar (eds.), Introduction to Nano Basics to Nanoscience
and Nanotechnology (Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, 2015)

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20ME101 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
L T P C
2 0 2 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
Introduction to AutoCAD commands, simple drawings, orthographic projections, projection of points,
lines, planes; auxiliary projections; projections and sections of solids; development and intersection of
surfaces; isometric projections.

Course Objectives:
1. Engineering Graphics is the primary medium for development and communicating design
concepts.
2. Through this course the students are trained in Engineering Graphics concepts with the use of
AutoCAD.
3. The latest ISI code of practice is followed while preparing the drawings using AutoCAD.
4. Computerized drawing is an upcoming technology and provides accurate and easily modifiable
graphics entities.
5. Storage and Retrieval of Drawings is also very easy and it takes very less time to prepare the
drawings. Also enhances the creativity.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AUTO CAD 12 hours


Introduction to AutoCAD commands, simple drawings using AutoCAD, Introduction to orthographic
Projections – Theory, techniques, first angle projections and third angle projections.

UNIT II PROJECTIONS OF POINTS & LINES 12 hours


Projections of points: Positions, notation system and projections. Projections of lines: Positions, terms
used, different cases, traces of lines and finding true length.

UNIT III PROJECTIONS OF PLANES & SOLIDS 12 hours


Projections of planes: Positions, terms used, different cases and projections procedure.
Projections of Solids: Projections of Regular Solids inclined to one plane (resting only on HP).

UNIT IV SECTIONS AND DEVELOPMENTS OF SOLIDS 12 hours


Section of solids: Sectional view of right regular solids (Prism and cylinder), true shapes of the
sections.
Development of Surfaces: Development of surfaces of right regular solids (Prism, Cylinder and their
Sectional Parts).

UNIT V INTERSECTIONS & ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS 12 hours


Intersections of surfaces of solids: Intersection between prism Vs prism, prism Vs cylinder, cylinder
Vs cylinder.
Isometric Projections: Theory of isometric drawing and orthographic views, Conversion of isometric
view into orthographic views.

Course Outcomes:
Student will be able to
1. Identify various commands in AutoCAD software and apply AutoCAD skills to develop the new
designs.
2. Draw the projections of points, straight lines using AutoCAD.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

3. Draw the projections of the planes, solids using AutoCAD


4. Sketch the developments of solids, sections of solids using AutoCAD.
5. Draw the conversion of the isometric views to orthographic views and intersections of surfaces using
AutoCAD.

Text Books:
D.M. Kulkarni, A.P. Rastogi and A.M. Sarkar., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI Learning Private
1. Limited, New Delhi 2009.
2 N D Bhat, Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House, Gujarath,15th Edition, 2010.
3 K.L. Narayana, P. Kanniah, Engineering Drawing, Scitech Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2010.

Reference Books:
1. Dhananjay A Jolhe, Engineering Drawing: with an introduction to AutoCAD, Tata McGraw Hill,
2008.
2 Warren J. Luzadder & Jon M. Duff Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, 11th edition, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20CSE101 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING (PYTHON)
L T P C
2 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
Python is a language with a simple syntax, and a powerful set of libraries. It is an interpreted language,
with a rich programming environment. While it is easy for beginners to learn, it is widely used in many
scientific areas for data exploration. This course is an introduction to the Python programming
language for students without prior programming experience.
This course provides knowledge on how to implement programs in python language and to solve
computational problems using the various programming constructs including data structures,
functions, string handling mechanisms and file handling concepts

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Learn Python programming constructs.
2. Implement Python programs with conditional structures and loops.
3. Use functions for structuring Python programs.
4. Handle compound data using Python lists, tuples, and dictionaries.
5. Manipulate data using files handling in Python.
6. Getting exposed to the basics of Object Oriented Programming using Python

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION 12 hours


Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (flow chart), History of Python, features of Python Programming,
Running Python Scripts, Variables, Assignment, Keywords, Input-Output, Indentation. Data Types - Integers,
Strings, Boolean.
a) Develop a flowchart for the various arithmetic operations on numbers.
b) Develop a flowchart to check whether the number is positive or negative.
c) Develop a flowchart for finding whether a given number is even or odd.
d) Develop a flowchart for finding biggest number among three numbers.
e) Develop a flowchart for displaying reversal of a number.
f) Develop a flowchart to print factorial of a number using function.
g) Develop a flowchart to generate prime numbers series up to N using function.
h) Develop a flowchart to check given number is palindrome or not using function.
i) Alexa travelled 150 kms by train. How much distance in miles she actually covered?

UNIT II: OPERATORS AND EXPRESSIONS 12 hours


Operators- Arithmetic Operators, Comparison (Relational) Operators, Assignment Operators, Logical
Operators, Bitwise Operators, Membership Operators, Identity Operators, Expressions and order of evaluations.
Control Flow - if, if-elif else, for, while, break, continue, pass.
a) Swapping of two number with and without using temporary variable.
b) If the age of Ram, Sam, and Khan are input through the keyboard, write a python program to determine the
eldest and youngest of the three.
c) Develop a program that performs arithmetic operations (Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division)
on integers. Input the two integer values and operator for performing arithmetic operation through keyboard.
The operator codes are as follows:
 For code '+', perform addition.
 For code '-', perform subtraction.
 For code '*', perform multiplication.
 For code '/', perform division.
d) Implement the python program to generate the multiplication table.
e) Implement Python program to find sum of natural numbers
f) If the first name of a student is input through the keyboard, write a program to display the vowels and
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

consonants present in his/her name.


g) The marks obtained by a student in 5 different subjects are input through the keyboard. Find the average
and print the student grade as per the MITS examination policy as shown below.
% OBTAINED GRADE
90 - 100 O (Outstanding)
80 - 89 A+ (Excellent)
70 - 79 A (Very Good)
60 - 69 B+ (Good)
50 - 59 B (Above)
45 - 49 C (Average)
40 - 44 P (Pass)
< 40 F (Fail)
h) Implement Python Script to generate prime numbers series up to N.
i) Given a number x, determine whether it is Armstrong number or not. Hint: For example, 371 is an Armstrong
number since 3**3 + 7**3 + 1**3 = 371. Write a program to find all Armstrong number in the range of 0 and
999.

UNIT-III: DATA STRUCTURES 12 hours


Lists - Operations, Slicing, Methods; Tuples, Sets, Dictionaries, Sequences. Comprehensions. Functions -
Defining Functions, Calling Functions, Passing Arguments, variable in python-Global and Local Variables.
a) Write a Python script to
 create a list
 access elements from a list
 slice lists
 change or add elements to a list
 delete or remove elements from a list
b) Write a Python script to read the values from a list and to display largest and smallest numbers from list.
c) Write a Python script to compute the similarity between two lists.
d) Write a Python script to read set of values from a Tuple to perform various operations.
e) Write a Python script to perform basic dictionary operations like insert, delete and display.
f) Write a Python program to count the occurrence of each word in a given sentence.
g) Define a dictionary named population that contains the following data.
Keys Values
Shanghai 17.8
Istanbul 13.3
Karachi 13.0
Mumbai 12.5
h) Write a Python script to create Telephone Directory using dictionary and list to perform basic functions
such as Add entry, Search, Delete entry, Update entry, View and Exit.
i) Implement Python script to display power of given numbers using function.
j) Implement a Python program that takes a list of words and returns the length of the longest one using
function.

UNIT-IV:
String Handling -Modules: Creating modules, import statement, from import statement, name spacing
Files and Directories:
a) Implement Python program to perform various operations on string using string libraries.
b) Implement Python program to remove punctuations from a given string.
c) Write a Python program to change the case of the given string (convert the string from lower case to upper
case). If the entered string is “computer”, your program should output “COMPUTER” without using library
functions.
d) Implement Python program to capitalize each word in a string. For example, the entered sentence “god
helps only people who work hard” to be converted as “God Helps Only People Who Work Hard”
e) Write a Python script to display file contents.
f) Write a Python script to copy file contents from one file to another.
g) Write a Python script to combine two text files contents and print the number of lines, sentences, words,
characters and file size.
h) Write a Python commands to perform the following directory operations.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

 List Directories and Files


 Making a New Directory
 Renaming a Directory or a File
 Removing Directory or File

UNIT-V:
Python packages: Predefined Packages and User-defined Packages, Package Creation.
Object Oriented Programming using Python: Introduction to OOP, Creating Classes and Objects in Python,
Creating Methods in Python
Brief Tour of the Standard Library: Turtle
a) Create a package named Cars and build three modules in it namely, BMW, Audi and Nissan. Illustrate the
modules using class. Finally we create the __init__.py file. This file will be placed inside Cars directory and
can be left blank or we can put the initialization code into it.
b) Create a class by name Student with instance variables such as roll_no, name, year_of_study, branch, section,
and marks in any five subjects. The class should also contain one method for calculating the percentage of
marks and the other method for printing a report as follows:
Roll
Name Year Section Branch M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 Percentage
No.
101 Abc I A CSE 58 68 95 47 56 64.8
b) Write a python script to display following shapes using turtle.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand problem solving techniques and their applications
2. Understand the syntax and semantics of python.
3. Demonstrate the use of Python lists and dictionaries.
4. Demonstrate the use of Python File processing, directories.
5. Describe and apply object-oriented programming methodology and Standard Library.

Text Books:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition, Updated
for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016
(http://greenteapress.com/wp/thinkpython/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated for
Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.

References:
1. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational Problem-
Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised and
expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013.
3. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
4. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction to
Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers,LLC,2013.
5. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python: An
Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20CHE201 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description:
It deals with basic principles of volumetric and instrumental analytical methods.

Course Objectives:
This Engineering Chemistry Laboratory is common to all branches of I Year B Tech. At the end of
the course the student is expected to Students will
1. Learn to estimate the chemical impurities present in water such as hardness, alkalinity, chlorine,
etc.
2. Understand and experience the formation of inorganic complex and analytical technique for
trace metal determination.
3. Be trained to use the instruments to practically understand the concepts of electrochemistry.
4. Bridge theoretical concepts and their practical engineering applications, thus
5. highlighting the role of chemistry in engineering.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Estimation of total, permanent and temporary hardness of water by EDTA method.
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample.
3. Estimation of dissolved oxygen by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by using Ostwald’s viscometer.
5. Determination of rate constant of an ester hydrolysis (Pseudo First Order reaction).
6. Determination of strength of a Strong acid (conc. H2SO4) by conductometric titration
(Neutralisation Titration).
7. Conductometric titration of BaCl2 Vs Na2SO4 (Precipitation Titration).
8. Dissociation constant of weak electrolyte by Conductometry.
9. Determination of percentage of Iron in Cement sample by colorimetry.
10. Estimation of ferrous ion by Potentiometric titration (Redox Titration).
11. Saponification value of oil.
12. Formation of Iron-1,10-phenanthroline complex and determination of iron by colorimetry.

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the Engineering Chemistry Laboratory experiments, students will be able to
1. Develop and perform analytical chemistry techniques to address the water related problems (for
e.g., hardness, alkalinity present in water) technically.
2. Handle electro-analytical instruments like digital conductivity meter and potentiometer to
perform neutralization, precipitation, and redox titrations, respectively.
3. Acquire practical skills to handle spectro-photochemical methods to verify Beer Lambert’s Law.
4. Operate various instruments for the analysis of materials and produce accurate results in a given
time frame.
5. Think innovatively and improve the creative skills that are essential for solving engineering
problems.

Textbook:
1. Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual (2017-18), Dept. of Chemistry, Madanapalle Institute of
Technology and Science, Madanapalle – 517325, Chittoor Dist., Andhra Pradesh, India.
2. “Vogel’s Textbook of Qualitative Chemical Analysis”, Arthur Israel Vogel, Prentice Hall,
2000.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

3. Laboratory Manual on Engineering Chemistry, by Dr Sudha Rani, Dhanpat Rai Publishing


house, 2009.
4. A Textbook on Experiments and calculations in Engineering Chemistry, by SS Dara, S Chand
publications, 2015.
5. Laboratory Manual of Organic Chemistry, by Raj K Bansal, Wiley Eastern Limited, New age
international limited, 2009.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester


20ME201 WORKSHOP PRACTICE
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course will provide students with a hands-on experience on various basic engineering practices.
This course will also provide an opportunity to the students to experience the various steps involved
in the industrial product fabrication.

Course Objectives:
1. Introduction to the use of Tools, Machinery and Power tools,
2. Hands on practice in Carpentry, Fitting, Forging, Tinsmith, Plumbing, Foundry, Welding,
Fabrication of plastic components, Metrology, Fabrication of Polymer Composite materials,
simple machine turning and wood turning, and basic electrical connections.
3. Introduction to 3 D Printing
4. Fabrication of final product at end of the semester

LIST OF TRADES
1. Carpentry (Cross half lap Joint and Miter Joint)
2. Fitting (Square and ‘V’ fit)
3. Turning (Ball pane hammer and handles)
4. Forging (S hook L hook)
5. Tin smithy (Square tray)
6. Plumbing (Wash basin and simple connection)
7. Foundry (Solid and Split pattern)
8. Welding (Arc and Gas welding)
9. Fabrication of plastic components (Pen Stand)
10. Metrology (Internal and External dimension)
11. Composite Material Sample Preparation (Demo Only)
12. Introduction of Power Tools and CNC (Demo Only)
13. Introduction to 3D Printing (Demo Only)

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
1. Fabricate carpentry components with suitable joint and pipe connections including plumbing
works.
2. Perform welding operation to join various structures.
3. Perform basic machining operations.
4. Create the models using sheet metal and plastic works.
5. Illustrate the operations of foundry, fitting and smithy
6. Fabricate a product using composite and plastic material
7. Design and fabricate a product using the tools and skills learned in the workshop

Suggested Text/Reference Books:


1. Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
2. Kalpakjian S. And Steven S. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, 4 th
edition, Pearson Education India Edition, 2002.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

3. Roy A. Lindberg, “Processes and Materials of Manufacture”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall India,
1998. (v) Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol. I and Vol. II, Tata McGrawHill House,
2017.
4. Work shop Manual / P.Kannaiah/ K.L.Narayana/ SciTech Publishers
5. Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol. I and Vol. II, Tata McGrawHill House,2017.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

I YEAR II SEMESTER
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20MAT107 LINEAR ALGEBRA, COMPLEX VARIABLES AND ORDINARY
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20MAT101

Course Description:
This course introduces the topics involving: Linear Algebra, Complex variable functions, Ordinary
Differential Equations and their applications. The course starts with algebra of matrix, systems of linear
equations and with preliminary course on complex variable. It introduces the CR equation, analytic
function, Taylor and Laurent series expansions and determination of residues. Emphasis also placed
on the development of concepts and applications for first and second order ordinary differential
equations (ODE), systems of differential equations and Laplace transforms.

Course Objectives:
1. To solve the system of linear equations, and develop orthogonal transformation with emphasis on
the role of Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors.
2. To analyze the function of complex variable and its analytic property with a review of elementary
complex function.
3. To understand the Taylor and Laurent expansion with their use in finding out the residue and
improper integral.
4. To identify important characteristics of ODE and develop appropriate method of obtaining solutions
of ODE.
5. Explore the use of ODE as models in various applications to solve initial value problems by using
Laplace transform method.

UNIT I MATRICES 9 hours


Symmetric, Skew-symmetric and Orthogonal matrices, Determinants, System of linear equations,
Inverse and rank of a matrix, rank-nullity theorem, Eigen values and eigenvectors, Diagonalization of
matrices, Cayley-Hamilton Theorem, and Orthogonal transformation.

UNIT II COMPLEX VARIABLE - DIFFERENTIATION 9 hours


Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations, Analytic function, Harmonic functions, finding harmonic
conjugate, Elementary analytic functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and their properties.

UNIT III COMPLEX VARIABLE - INTEGRATION 9 hours


Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat theorem (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof),
Liouville’s and Maximum-Modulus theorem (without proof); Taylor’s series, Zeros of analytic
functions, Singularities, Laurent’s expansion (without proof), Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem
(without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving sine and cosine.

UNIT IV FIRST ORDER ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 hours


Exact, Linear and Bernoulli’s, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p, equations solvable
for x, equations solvable for y and Clairaut’s type.

UNIT V ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF HIGHER 9 hours


ORDERS
Second and higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients and variable
coefficients, Method of variation of parameters.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Solve the systems of linear equations occurring in engineering system.
2. Determine harmonic function, velocity potential and stream lines in fluid flow systems.
3. Evaluate a contour integral and definite integral involving exponential, sine and cosine functions.
4. Find general solutions to first and second order homogeneous differential equations by algebraic
and computational methods.
5. Determine the solution of ODE of second and higher order.

Text Books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics by Dr. B.S. Grewal, 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers.
2. Complex variables and applications by R. V Churchill and J. W. Brown, 8th edition, 2008,
McGraw-Hill.

Reference Books
1. Elementary linear Algebra by Stephen Andrilli and David Hecker, 4th Edition, Elsevier, 2010.
2. Ordinary and partial differential equations. By M.D. Raisinghania, 2013. S. Chand Publishing.
3. Differential Equations with applications and historical notes by G.F. Simmons second edition,
McGraw Hill, 2003.
4. Linear Algebra and its Applications by D.C. Lay, 3rd edition, Pearson Education, Inc.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20PHY102 APPLIED PHYSICS
L T P C
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Plus two level physics course

Course Description:
Applied Physics for Electrical, Electronics and Computer Engineers is a basic physics course which
provides fundamental knowledge to understand the concepts of Waves, Optics, Quantum Mechanics,
Semiconductors, Lasers and Fiber Optics.

Course Objectives:
1. Expose students in understanding the basic laws of nature through wave equation using the
principles of oscillations and waves.
2. Analyze and understand the concepts of waves and optics to prepare the students for advanced level
courses.
3. Expose students to theoretical and mathematical aspects of Interference, Diffraction techniques,
Polarization and Lasers for testing of materials.
4. Develop knowledge and understanding the fundamental concepts of Quantum mechanics,
Semiconductors and Fiber Optics.
5. Adaptability to new developments in science and technology.

UNIT I WAVES AND OSCILLATIONS 11 hours


Simple harmonic motion, damped harmonic oscillations, forced harmonic oscillations, resonance, and
quality factor. Superposition of vibrations along same direction (equal frequency) and in perpendicular
directions, Lissajous figures.
Transverse waves, one dimensional wave equation, solution for wave equation, velocity of a transverse
wave along a stretched string, modes of vibration of stretched string, reflection and transmission waves
at boundary, standing waves, standing wave ratio.

UNIT II OPTICS 13 hours


Superposition of waves, interference of light by division of wavefront - Young’s double slit experiment,
interference of light by division of amplitude- interference in thin film by reflection, Newton’s rings
experiment.
Diffraction, Farunhofer diffraction due to single slit, double slit and Diffraction grating (Nslit).
Polarization, Types of polarization, Polarization by reflection, refraction and double refraction,
Nicol’s prism. Half wave and Quarter wave plates.

UNIT III QUANTUM MECHANICS 12 hours


De Broglie’s hypothesis, Uncertainty principle (Qualitative only), Postulates of quantum mechanics,
Time-dependent and time-independent Schrodinger equations for wave function, Free-particle wave
function and wave-packets (group velocity & phase velocity), Solution of wave equation: Solution of
stationary-state, Schrodinger equation for one dimensional problems – particle in a box, Scattering from
a potential barrier and principle of tunnelling- operation of scanning tunnelling microscope.

UNIT IV FREE ELECTRON THEORY & SEMICONDUCTORS 12 hours


Free electron theory of metals (drift velocity and electrical conductivity), Fermi energy level, density of
states, Kronig-Penney model (Qualitative only) and origin of energy bands, band structure of metals,
semiconductors, and insulators. Direct and indirect bandgap semiconductors, Intrinsic and extrinsic
semiconductors, Dependence of Fermi level on carrier concentration and temperature (equilibrium
carrier statistics), Drift and Diffusion Current, Hall effect.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V LASERS & FIBER OPTICS 12 hours


Introduction to lasers, characteristics of laser, spontaneous and stimulated emission, Einstein’s
coefficients; population inversion, excitation mechanisms, solid-state lasers – ruby laser, gas Lasers -
He-Ne Laser, applications of lasers.
Fiber Optics: Principle, Construction and working of optical fiber, Acceptance angle, Numerical
aperture, Types of fiber, Fiber optic communication system.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Describe a mathematical wave equation using the principles of waves and oscillations
2. Apply the knowledge for materials testing using Interference, Diffraction & Polarization techniques.
3. Understand the idea of wave function and to solve Schrodinger equation for simple potentials.
4. Explain the role of semiconductors in different realms of physics and their applications in both
science and technology.
5. Acquire the basic knowledge of lasers and fiber optics.

Text Books:
1. Engineering Physics –Dr. M.N. Avadhanulu & Dr. P.G. Kshirsagar, S. Chand and Company
2. Engineering Physics –K. Thyagarajan, McGraw Hill Publishers.

Reference Books:
1. H. J. Pain, “The physics of vibrations and waves”, Wiley, 2006.
2. Physics Vol I & II, Halliday/Resnick/Krane 5th Edition, John Wiley, 2003.
3. B.G. Streetman, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Prentice Hall of India, 1995.
4. Concepts of Modern Physics by Arthur Beiser, 7th Edition, 2017.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20EEE101 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
L T P C
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Intermediate Physics

Course Description:
This course equips the students with a basic understanding of Electrical circuits and machines for
specific applications. In specific, the course covers basic of DC circuit & its analysis, introduction to
single-phase and three-phase AC Systems, magnetic materials, transformers, DC & AC electrical
machines, basic converters and Components of LT Switchgear.

Course Objectives:
1. To learn the basics of the D.C. circuit analysis.
2. To have an idea about single-phase and three-phase A.C. electrical circuits.
3. To gain knowledge about basic magnetic material and transformers.
4. To learn the construction and operation of D.C. and A.C. machines.
5. To understand the operation of basic rectifiers and various components of LT Switchgear.

UNIT I DC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12 hours


Electrical circuit elements, voltage and current sources, Series and parallel resistive circuits, Kirchhoff’s
current and voltage laws, Nodal and Mesh analysis of simple circuits with dc excitation. Source
Transformation, Star-Delta Transformation, Superposition Theorem.

UNIT II AC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12 hours


Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms values, phasor representation, real power,
reactive power, apparent power, power factor. Analysis of single-phase ac circuits consisting of R, L, C,
RL, RC, RLC combinations. Three phase balanced circuits, voltage and current relations in star and delta
connections.

UNIT III MAGNETIC MATERIALS AND TRANSFORMERS 12 hours


Magnetic materials, B-H characteristics, ideal and practical transformer, principle of operation, emf
equation, equivalent circuit, losses in transformers, regulation and efficiency.

UNIT IV DC AND AC MACHINES 12 hours


Construction, working, emf equation of DC generator, methods of excitation, speed control of dc motor.
Introduction to different types of AC motors, Three Phase Induction Motors - Generation of rotating
magnetic fields, construction, working and starting methods: D.O.L, Autotransformer starter.
Introduction to Alternators.

UNIT V RECTIFIERS AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 12 hours


PN junction diode, half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers. Components of LT Switchgear:
switch fuse unit (SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, types of wires and cables – Current carrying
capability, Insulation Strength; Earthing.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. To understand and analyze basic DC electric circuits.
2. To measure and analyze various electrical quantities of single phase and three AC electric circuits.
3. To understand magnetic materials and to analyze the transformers.
4. To study the working principles of electrical machines.
5. To create power converters for domestic applications with LT switchgear.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. E. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronics Technology”, Pearson, 2010.
2. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. D. C. Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. L. S. Bobrow, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
5. V. D. Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall India, 1989.

Reference Books:
1. Abhijit Chakrabarti, “Circuit Theory : Analysis and Synthesis”, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2014.
2. J.B. Gupta, “Theory & Performance of Electrical Machines”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2013.
3. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology”, Fourth edition, Elsevier Ltd., 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20CSE102 C PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20CSE101

Course Description:
This course includes C program basics, control structures, arrays, files, pointers and data structures.

Course Objectives:
1. To make the student understand fundamentals of C programming language and problem solving.
2. To understand the syntax and semantics of C programming language.
3. To develop algorithms for sorting, searching techniques.
4. To design and implement operations on stack, queue, and linked list.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO C PROGRAMMING 9 hours


Structure of C Program, C Tokens: Variables, Data types, Constants, Identifiers, key words and
Operators, Expressions.
Control Structures: Conditional Statements (Simple if, if-else, Nested -if-else, Switch). Iterative
Statements (for, While, Do-While), Jump Statements (break, Continue).

UNIT II FUNCTIONS & ARRAY 9 hours


Functions Introduction, User defined function, Function prototype, Function Definition and Function
Call, Storage classes, Recursion Arrays: Defining an array, processing an array, one dimensional arrays,
two dimensional arrays. Passing array as an argument to function. Sorting: Bubble Sort, Insertion Sort,
selection sort. Searching: Linear and binary search.

UNIT III STRINGS & POINTERS 9 hours


Strings: Declaring and defining a string, Initialization of strings, Strings Library functions.
Pointers: Fundamentals of pointer, Pointer Declarations, Parameter passing: Pass by value, Pass by
reference, Dynamic memory allocation.

UNIT IV STRUCTURES & FILES 9 hours


Structures: Defining a structure, processing a structure, Pointer to Structure, Unions.
Files: Opening and closing a data file, Reading and Writing a data file, File I/O Functions.

UNIT V DATA STRUCTURES 12 hours


Stack: stack operations, stack implementations using arrays.
Queue: queue operations, queue implementations using array, Applications of stack and queue.
Linked List: Single linked list operations.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand fundamentals of C programming language and its constructs.
2. Design and implement applications using functions, arrays, sorting and searching techniques.
3. Design and implement applications using strings and pointers.
4. Design and implement applications using structures and File processing.
5. Choose appropriate linear data structure depending on the problem to be solved.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. The C Programming Language, Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, 2 nd Edition, Prentice
Hall, India 1988.
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2006.

Reference Books:
1. Let us C, Yashavant Kanetkar, 15th Edition, BPB Publications, 2016.
2. Problem Solving & Program Design in C, Hanly, Jeri R and Elliot. B Koffman, Pearson Education,
5th edition, 2007.
3. K. N. King ,"C Programming ": A Modern Approach, 2nd Edition 2nd Edition.
4. Byron Gottfried , Jitender Chhabra , Programming with C (Schaum's Outlines Series)

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20ENG201 ENGLISH FOR PROFESSIONAL PURPOSES LABORATORY
(Common to all branches)
L T P C
0 0 2 1
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
English language communication is a social phenomenon and students need to be able to function in
the society at large as the communicators before entering the professional world. The present course
equips the students with the basic functions of English language communication, which are required
not only in their day-to-day lives but also profoundly significant for their future professional, academic
training and their careers in the industry. The course mainly focuses on the achievement of
communicative proficiency of the students coupled with the necessary linguistic inputs.

Course Objectives:
This course enables the student to –
1. Get aquatinted with the basic communicative functions.
2. Engage effectively in learning various functions of English language communication.
3. Enhance their narration abilities in past experiences and future plans and goals/events.
4. Develop their abilities in expressing opinion.
5. Provide speaking practice in speech.

Course contents:
Greeting and Introductions (L & S)
Greeting on different occasions and responding to greetings (L & S)
Wishing on various occasions, taking leave and saying goodbye (L & S)
Introducing oneself and others (L & S)
Asking for introduction and responding to introduction (L & S)
Developing a short personal profile (R &W)

Describing: (L, S, R & W)


Using adjectives (Vocab)
Degrees of comparison (Grammar)
Common words, phrases, and expressions used for description (Vocab)
Describing people, places and objects (L, S, R & W)
Reading and writing descriptive paragraphs (R &W)

Narrating (L, S, R & W)


Talking about past experiences and events (L & S)
Talking about memorable incidents or events (L & S)
Techniques of narration and narrative tenses (Grammar)
Composing and narrating a story (R &W)

Planning and Predicting (L, S, R & W)


Talking about future events (L & S)
Making promises and giving assurances (L & S)
Predicting future events (L & S)
Writing and organising a short plan of an event (R &W)
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Instructions and directions (L, S, R & W)


Forming imperative sentences (Grammar)
Reading and writing short instruction manuals (R &W)
Writing a recipe/ procedure (R &W)
Giving directions

Enquiring: (L, S, R & W)


Open and closed ended questions (Grammar)
Asking for information and giving information (L & S)
Telephonic enquiry (L & S)
Official enquiries through emails and letters (R &W)

Requesting: (L, S, R & W)


Polite expressions
Modal verbs and key phrases for requesting (Grammar and vocab)
Official requests through emails and letters (R &W)

Comparing and contrasting: (L, S, R & W)


Words and phrases used for comparison and contrast (Vocab)
Comparing qualities/properties/quantities of people, places and objects (L & S)
Composing comparison and contrast paragraphs (R &W)

Expressing opinion: (L, S, R & W)


Language expressions used for expressing opinions (Vocab)
Developing opinion based paragraphs (R &W)
Discourse markers and linkers used in opinion based paragraphs (R &W)

Public Speaking: (L, S, R & W)


Techniques and strategies required for public speaking (L & S)
Developing and organising a short speech (R &W)
Presentation skills required for public speaking (L & S)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Develop their confidence while giving introduction, describing a place, & giving directions.
(3,4,5)
2. Use various functions of English like asking for & giving information, inviting people for
events/occasions, & requesting people. (3,4,5)
3. Narrate the past experiences and events in speaking and wring (3,4,5)
4. Express their views and opinions logically and appropriately in spoken and written format.
(3,4,5,6)
5. Deliver logically organized speeches and present them without hesitations. (3,4,5, 6)

Text Books:
1. Leo Jones; Functions of English, Published by: Cambridge University Press.
2. Leo Jones; Let’s Talk Level 1, 2, 3, Published by: Cambridge University Press.
3. Adrian Doff, Craig Thaine, Herbert Puchta, et al; Empower: Intermediate (B1+); Published by:
Cambridge University Press.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

References:
1. AJ Thomson & AV Martinet; A Practical English Grammar; Oxford University Press,2015.
2. Raymond Murphy; English Grammar in Use with CD; Cambridge University Press 2013.
3. K.S. Yadurajan; Modern English Grammar; Oxford University Press, 2014.
4. William Strunk Jr; The Elements of Style; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY, 2006
5. Joseph Devlin; How to Speak and Write Correctly; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P.HUMPHREY, 2006
6. Anjana Agarwal; Powerful Vocabulary Builder; New Age Publishers, 2011.
7. Writing Tutor; Advanced English Learners’ Dictionary; Oxford University Press, 2012
8. www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
9. https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/english-grammar
10. https://www.rong-chang.com/

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20PHY201 PHYSICS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Description:
Physics Practical course is meant for making the students to gain practical knowledge to co relate with
the theoretical studies. It covers experiments on Principles of Mechanics and Optics, Measurement of
Magnetic field and studying Resonance using LCR Circuit.

Course Objectives:
1. Elucidate the concepts of Physics through involvement in the experiment by applying theoretical
knowledge.
2. Illustrate the basics of mechanics, waves and optics to analyze the behavior and characteristics of
various materials for its optimum utilization.
3. Develop an ability to apply the knowledge of physics experiments in the later studies.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
{Out of 17 experiments any 12 experiments (minimum 10) must be performed in a semester}
1. Spring constant - Coupled Pendulums.
2. Study of resonance effect in series and parallel LCR circuit.
3. Determination of radius of curvature of a curved surface - Newton’s Rings.
4. Wavelength of a laser - Diffraction Grating
5. Wavelength of the spectral lines - Diffraction Grating.
6. Magnetic field along the axis of a current carrying coil - Stewart Gees’ Apparatus
7. Thickness of a given wire - Wedge Method.
8. Dispersive power of prism – Spectrometer.
9. Frequency of the tuning fork - Melde’s apparatus.
10. Determination of particle size using Laser.
11. Width of single slit - Diffraction due to Single Slit.
12. Torsional Pendulum.
13. Determination of the numerical aperture of a given optical fiber and hence to find its
acceptance angle.
14. Measurement of e/m of electron (Thomson’s method)
15. Energy gap of a material of p-n junction.
16. Determination of Planck’s constant.
17. Ferroelectric hysteresis (B-H Curve).

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Apply the scientific process in the conduct and reporting of experimental investigations.
2. Understand measurement technology, usage of new instruments and real time applications in
engineering studies.
3. Verify the theoretical ideas and concepts covered in lecture by doing hands on in the experiments.
4. Know about the characteristics of various materials in a practical manner and gain knowledge
about various optical technique methods.
5. Acquire and interpret experimental data to examine the physical laws.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Reference Books:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual.
2. Optics, A. Ghatak, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 2011.
3. Fundamentals of Optics, F. A. Jenkins and H. E. White, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1981.
4. Engineering Mechanics, 2nd ed. — MK Harbola.
5. Introduction to Electrodynamics- David J Griffiths.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20EEE201 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The laboratory facilitates the students to deal with electrical instruments, which further strengthen the
concepts & operation of various AC & DC circuits, and machines, and their characteristics. The lab
also reinforce the concepts discussed in class with a hands-on approach which enable the students to
gain significant experience with electrical instruments such as ammeter, voltmeter, digital multimeter,
oscilloscopes, tachometer, switches, fuses and power supplies.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide hands on experience in setting up simple electrical circuits (DC and AC).
2. To get exposure to handle different electrical equipment’s.
3. To measure various electrical parameters with different measuring instruments.
4. To get hands on experience in operating DC and AC machines.
5. To understand the operation of basic converters and various components of LT Switchgear..
LIST OF LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS/DEMONSTRATIONS:
DEMONSTRATIONS:
1. Basic safety precautions. Introduction and use of measuring instruments – voltmeter, ammeter,
wattmeter, multi-meter, oscilloscope. Study of passive components - resistors, capacitors and
inductors.
2. Demonstration of voltage and current relationships (line-line voltage, phase-to-neutral voltage,
line and phase currents). In star and delta connections.
3. Demonstration of cut-out sections of transformer and DC & AC machines.
4. Demonstration of induction machine. Motor operation and generator operation of an induction
machine driven at super-synchronous speed.
5. Wavelength of the spectral lines - Diffraction Grating.
6. Familiarization of (i) different types of cables/wires and switches and their uses, (ii) different
types of fuses & fuse carriers; MCB, ELCB, MCCB their ratings and uses (components of LT
switchgear).

EXPERIMENTS:
1. Wiring of a simple circuit for controlling (1) a lamp/fan point, (2) Staircase or Corridor Winding.
2. Wiring of a power circuit for controlling an electrical appliance (16A Socket).
3. Verification of Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws (KCL & KVL).
4. Verification of superposition theorem
5. Sinusoidal steady state response of R-L, and R-C circuits (impedance calculation and
verification).
6. Measurement of voltage, current and power in a single-phase circuit using voltmeter, ammeter
and wattmeter. Also, calculate the power factor of the circuit.
7. Measurement of voltage, current and power in a single-phase circuit using voltmeter, ammeter
and wattmeter. Also, calculate the power factor of the circuit.
8. Open-circuit and short-circuit test on a single-phase transformer.
9. Speed control of separately excited DC motor.

10. Wiring of a power distribution arrangement using single-phase MCB distribution board
with ELCB, main switch and energy meter (or residential house wiring).
11. Regulated power supply for generating a constant DC Voltage.
12. Fabrication of a given electronic circuit on a PCB and test the same.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students are expected to
1. Get an exposure to common electrical components and their ratings.
2. Make electrical connections by wires of appropriate ratings.
3. Understand the usage of common electrical measuring instruments.
4. Understand the basic characteristics of transformers and electrical machines.
5. Get an exposure to the working of various power electronic converters.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester


20CSE201 C PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Prerequisite: 20CSE101

Course Description:
This course includes C program basics, control structures, arrays, files, pointers and data structures.

Course Objectives:
1. To make the student understand fundamentals of C programming language and problem solving.
2. To get hands-on practices with the syntax and semantics of C programming language.
3. To develop algorithms for sorting, searching techniques.
4. To design and implement operations on stacks, queues, and linked lists.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. a) Write a C program to swap the two numbers.
b) Write a C Program to find the eligibility of admission for a Professional course based on the
following criteria:
i. Marks in Maths >=65
ii. Marks in Physics >=55
iii. Marks in Chemistry>=50
OR
iv. Total in all three subject >=180
2. a) Write a C program to compute the factorial of a given number.
b) Write a program that reads numbers which are in the range 0 to 100, till it encounters -1. Print
the sum of all the integers that you have read before you encountered -1.
3. a) Write a C program to accept a coordinate point in a XY coordinate system and determine in
which quadrant the coordinate point lies.
b) The digital root (also called repeated digital sum) of a number is a single digit value obtained
by an iterative process of summing digits. Digital sum of 65536 is 7, because 6+5+5+3+6=25
and 2+5 = 7.Write a program that takes an integer as input and prints its digital root.
4. a) Write a C program to find the series of prime numbers in the given range.
b) Write a C program to generate Tribonacci numbers in the given range.
5. a) Write a C program to find sum of digits, Decimal to Binary conversion, reversal of numbers
using functions.
b) Write a C program to find Factorial, Greatest Common Divisor, and Fibonacci using recursion.
6. Your program should take as input: dimension of a square matrix N, two matrices of size N x N
with integer values, and one operator symbol (+, - ,*). It must perform the corresponding
operation given below;
a) Matrix Addition b) Matrix Subtraction c) Matrix Multiplication
7. Implement the following sorting techniques.
a) Bubble sort b) Insertion sort c) Selection sort.
8. Implement the following searching techniques.
a) Linear Search b) Binary Search
9. a) Write a program in C to find the frequency of characters in a string.
b) Write a C program to implement all string operations (string length, string copy, string
compare, string concatenation and string reverse) without using string library functions.
10. a) Write a C program to get N elements in an array and sort it using Pointer.
b) Write a C program to swap two integers using pass by reference.
c) Write a C program to find the largest element using Dynamic Memory Allocation.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

11. a) Write a program in C to count the number of vowels, consonants, digits, special symbols,
words in a string using a pointer.
b) Write a C program to print all permutations of a given string using pointers.
12. a) Write a C program to add two distances in the inch-feet system using structures.
b) Write a C program to calculate difference between Two Time Periods (in Hours, Minutes,
Seconds format) using structures.
13. Develop an application to match parenthesis of a given expression using Stack.
14. Develop an application to identify Palindrome string using Stack and Queue.
15. Develop an application to add two Polynomial equations using Linked List.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand fundamentals of C programming language and its constructs.
2. Design applications using functions, arrays, sorting and searching techniques.
3. Design and implement solutions using strings and pointers.
4. Design and develop solutions using structures and File processing.
5. Design and develop applications on stack, queue, and linked list depending on the problems to be
solved.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

II Year I Semester
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20HUM101 ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING FOR ENGINEERS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite NIL

Course Description:
The Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting aims to provide an insight into production, cost
analysis, market structure, Accounting Basic concepts and financial Statement Analysis. The course
is designed to give emphasis on the application of real life examples on various fundamental issues of
economics and accounts. This course introduces the accounting system, principles, types of accounts,
and financial statements etc. The ratio analysis and financial analysis are useful to know the positions
of financial statements are explained to know the analysis of financial matters.

Course Objectives:
1. Describe the nature of engineering economics in dealing with the issues of scarcity;
2. Know the supply, demand, production and cost analysis to analyze the impact of economic events
on markets;
3. Explain the performance of firms under different market structures and Price determination in
various market conditions.
4. Explain the accounting principles, types of accounting and preparation of final accounts; and
5. Describe the financial statement analysis and investment evaluation through ratios and capital
budgeting techniques.

UNIT I DEMAND ANALYSIS 9 hours

Scope and Significance of Economics- Understanding the problem of scarcity and choice - Elements
of market Economy: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium- Theory of Demand, Elasticity of
Demand, Supply and Law of Supply.

UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9 hours


Production Function – Short-run and long- run production – Cost Analysis: Cost concepts - Cost
Structure of Firms and output decision- Break-Even Analysis (BEA) – Managerial significance and
limitations of BEA - Determination of Break Even Point (Simple Problems).

UNIT III MARKET STRUCTURE AND PRICING 9 hours


Classification of Markets - General Equilibrium and efficiency of Perfect competition, Monopoly,
Monopolistic, Oligopoly, Duopoly – Price determination under various market conditions- Pricing
objectives- Methods.

UNIT IV BASICS OF ACCOUNTING 9 hours


Uses of Accounting - Book Keeping Vs Accounting - Double Entry System - Accounting Principles
- Classification of Accounts - Rules Of Debit & Credit- Accounting Cycle: Journal, Ledger, Trial
Balance. Final Accounts: Trading Account - Profit & Loss Account - Balance Sheet with Adjustments,
(Simple Problems).

UNIT V FINANCIAL RATIO ANALYSIS AND CAPITAL BUDGETING 9 hours


Ratio Analysis - Liquidity, Leverage, Solvency, Activity and Profitability Ratios - Capital Budgeting.
(Simple Problems).
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Understand Engineering economics basic concepts,
2. Analyze the concepts of demand, elasticity, supply, Production, Cost Analysis and its essence in
floating of an organization,
3. Compare different market structures and identify suitable market,
4. Demonstrate an understanding and analyzing the accounting statements, and
5. Exhibit the ability to apply knowledge of ratio analysis and capital budgeting techniques in financial
statement analysis and investment evaluation respectively.

Text Books:
1. Case E. Karl & Ray C. Fair, “Principles of Economics”, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2007.
2. Financial Accounting, S. N. Maheshwari, Sultan Chand, 2009
3. Financial Statement Analysis, Khan and Jain, PHI, 2009
4. Financial Management, Prasanna Chandra, T.M.H, 2009

Reference Books:
1. Lipsey, R. G. & K. A. Chrystal , “Economics”, Oxford University Press, 11th Edition, 2007
2. Samuelson P. A. & Nordhaus W. D. “Economics”, Tata McGraw-Hill 18th Edition, 2007.
3. Financial Management and Policy, Van Horne, James, C., Pearson, 2009.
4. Financial Management, I. M. Pandey, Vikas Publications

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20MAT113 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20MAT101, 20MAT107

Course Description:
Transform calculus is one of the important topics in the study of electronics and communication
engineering because of its widespread applications. The course covers the applications of Laplace
Transforms, Fourier and Z-Transforms relevant to communication engineering. The course also
provides exposition to formation and solving of Partial Differential Equations and its applications.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Apply Laplace transform and inverse Laplace transform to solve ordinary differential equations.
2. Apply Fourier transform and Inverse Fourier transform to solve sine and cosine transforms.
3. Introduce the concept of Z-transforms and its applications.
4. Formulate the Partial Differential Equations and solve the equations of first order.
5. Understand the concept of eigenvalues and eigen functions and solve the boundary value problems.

UNIT I LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 9 hours


Introduction - Applications to Differential Equations - Derivatives and Integrals of Laplace
transforms, Convolutions - Integral Equation - Unit step and Impulse functions.

UNIT II FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9 hours


Introduction – Fourier Integral theorem (without proof) - Fourier Sine and Cosine Integrals - complex
form of Fourier integrals, Fourier transforms - Properties - Inverse Fourier sine and cosine transforms,
Convolution theorem.

UNIT III Z – TRANSFORMS 9 hours


Introduction to Z-transform, Linearity property - Damping rule - Shifting rule - Initial and final value
theorems, Inverse Z- transforms, convolution theorem - Evaluation of Inverse transforms - application
to solve difference equations.

UNIT IV PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 hours


Introduction - Formation of Partial Differential Equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and
arbitrary functions - Linear equations of first order - nonlinear equations of the first order

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 hours


Eigenvalues and Eigen functions - method of separation of variables - One dimensional wave equation
- One dimensional heat equation.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Apply Laplace transforms in solving ordinary differential equations relevant to the
representations of communication systems.
2. Apply Fourier transforms and Inverse Fourier transforms for solving boundary value problems
in the field of communications.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

3. Apply Z-Transforms and Inverse Z- transforms for solving difference equations in


communication system analysis.
4. Solve the linear and nonlinear partial differential equations of the first order.
5. Solve the one dimensional wave and heat boundary value problems.

Text Books:
1. George F. Simmons, “Differential Equations with Applications and Historical Notes”, McGraw
Hill Education (India) Private Limited, second Edition, 2014.
2. B.S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 42nd Edition, 2012.

Reference Books:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10/e, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. N.P. Bali and M. Goyal, “A text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Laxmi Publications, 2008.
3. W. E. Boyce and R. C. DiPrima, “Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value
Problems”, Wiley India, 2009.
4. G.F. Simmons and S.G. Krantz, “Differential Equations”, McGraw Hill, 2007.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20ECE101 NETWORK THEORY
L T P C
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisite 20EEE101

Course Description:
This course is designed to provide basic understanding on electrical circuit analysis and synthesis.
This also provides an exposure to coupled circuits, two port network analysis and filters.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the formulation of network equations, Network theorems and Graph theory.
2.Expose the students to the concepts of resonance in electrical circuit
3. Expose the students to the concepts of various types of Transient analysis of different electrical
circuits with and without initial conditions using Laplace Transform.
4. Demonstrate relationship of two port network variables and connections.
5. Analyse and design passive network filter circuits, attenuators and equalizers

UNIT I NETWORK THEOREMS 9 hours


Network Theorems-Linearity and Superposition, Reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum
Power Transfer, Milliman, Miller & Tellegan’s Theorems. Source Transformation. Network
Topology Formation of Incidence Matrix, Tieset and Cutset Matrix formation.

UNIT II RESONANCE 9 hours


Definition of ‘quality factor Q’ of inductor and capacitor, Series resonance: Impedance variation with
frequency; universal resonance curves, Q factor and Bandwidth of the series resonant circuits, Parallel
resonance (or anti-resonance): Impedance variation with frequency, Q factor and Bandwidth of
parallel resonant circuits, Resonance between parallel RC and RL circuit.

UNIT III APPLICATION OF LAPLACE TRANSFORM TO ELECTRIC 9 hours


CIRCUITS
Laplace transforms and properties: Partial fractions, singularity functions, waveform synthesis,
Analysis of RC, RL and RLC networks with and without initial conditions with Laplace transforms
evaluation of initial conditions.

UNIT IV TWO PORT NETWORKS 9 hours


Relationship of two port variables, Short circuit admittance parameters, Open circuit impedance
parameters, Transmission parameters, Hybrid parameters, Relationship between parameter sets,
Series, Cascade and Parallel connection of two port networks.

UNIT V FILTER DESIGN 9 hours


Introduction, the Neper & decibel, Properties of symmetricalT and πnetworks, the Filter
fundamentals; pass and stop bands, Behavior of characteristic impedance, Variation of characteristic
impedance over the pass band, The constant – k filters T and π section. Attenuators: T-Type, Pi-Type,
Bridged T-Type. Equalizers: Inverse impedances. Series and Shunt equalizers, T-equalizers and
Bridged T-equalizers.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Apply various theorems to solve the networks.
2. Analyse the series and parallel resonance circuits.
3. Analyze the response of RL, RC and RLC circuits with different inputs.
4. Solve two port networks analysis.
5. Design symmetrical and unsymmetrical passive filters.

Text Books:
1. Sudhakar, A and Shyammohan S. Palli., “Circuits and Networks, Analysis and Synthesis”,
McGraw-Hill Education India Pvt. Ltd, 5th Edition, 2010
2. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2011.

Reference Books:
1. M.E. Van Valkenburg, “Analog Filter Design”, Oxford University Press, 2010.

2. Franklin F. Kuo, “Network Analysis and synthesis”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2006

3. Chenna Venkatesh, K and Ganesh Rao, D., “Network Analysis- A Simplified Approach”,
Elsevier, 2nd Edition, 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20ECE102 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
L T P C
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisite 20EEE101

Course Description:
This course provides a modern introduction to logic design and the basic building blocks used in digital
systems. It starts with a discussion of basics related to logic simplification using Boolean algebra and
other minimization techniques. Then, a brief discussion of combinational logic design, sequential logic
design, logic families and VLSI Design flow have been considered.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Familiarize fundamental principles of digital system design.
2. Understand and design the combinational logic circuits.
3. Understand and design sequential logic circuits.
4. Summarize digital integrated circuits, different logic families, semiconductor memories,
and Programmable logic devices.
5. Understand the VLSI Design flow and the IEEE Standard 1076 Hardware Description
Language (VHDL).

UNIT I LOGIC SIMPLICATION 9 hours

Binary Systems: Digital Systems, Binary Numbers, Number Base Conversions, Octal and
Hexadecimal Numbers, Compliments, Signed Binary Numbers, Binary Codes. Boolean Algebra:
Basic Definitions, Boolean Algebra, Basic Theorems and properties of Boolean Algebra, Boolean
Functions, SOP & POS forms, Canonical forms, Karnaugh maps up to 5 variables, Other Logic
Operations, Logic Gates: Digital Logic Gates, NAND and NOR Implementation Integrated Circuits.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 hours


Combinational Circuits: Analysis Procedure, Design Procedure, Half and Full Adders, Subtractors,
Serial and Parallel Adders, BCD Adder, Decoder, Encoder, Multiplexers.
Combinational Logic Design: BCD to Seven Segment Decoder, Barrel Shifter and ALU

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 hours


Sequential Logic Design: Clock Triggering, Basics of Latch and Flip Flops, building blocks like S-R,
JK, D, T and Master-Slave JK FF, Ripple and Synchronous counters, Shift registers, Finite state
machines, Design of synchronous FSM Designing Synchronous Circuits: Pulse train generator,
Pseudo Random Binary Sequence generator, Clock generation

UNIT IV LOGIC FAMILIES AND SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORIES 9 hours


Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: Digital Integrated Circuits, Different logic families
(RTL, DTL, TTL), and their specifications, Noise margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, TTL
based NAND gate, Totem Pole TTL, CMOS logic families Memory Hierarchy & different types of
memories: Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog Converters Programmable logic devices:
Programmable Logic Array, Programmable Array Logic, and FPGA.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V VLSI DESIGN FLOW 9 hours


VLSI Design flow: Y-chart, Design entry: Schematic, HDL, Different modelling styles in VHDL:
Structural, Data Flow and Behavioural Data types and objects, Codes for combinational
(Adder/Subtractor/Multiplexers) and sequential circuits (Flip Flops/Counters), Synthesis and
Simulation.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Apply Boolean algebra and K-Map to simplify and design various logical circuits in digital
electronics.
2. Design and analyse various combinational logic circuits.
3. Design and analyse various sequential logic circuits.
4. Understand different logic families, design and implementation of digital circuits using
programmable logic devices.
5. Develop VHDL code to simulate and synthesize combinational and sequential logic circuits.

Text Book(s)
1. Morris Mano, M and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design” Pearson Education Ltd., 5th edition,
2013.
2. Douglas Perry, “VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002.

Reference Books
1. Hall, D V, “Digital Circuits and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL, A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”,


Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition, 2003.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20ECE103 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20EEE101

Course Description:
This course provides an overview of Semiconductor Physics and Carrier Transport Phenomenon. It
illustrates semiconductor PN junction diodes, & its small signal switching models, Bipolar junction
Transistors (BJT) & Eber’s Moll model, MOS Transistors and their characteristics.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Acquire fundamental knowledge and expose to the field of semiconductor theory and
devices and their applications.
2. Introduce different types of semiconductor devices.
3. Describe operation and characteristics of Bipolar Junction Transistor & Field Effect
Transistor.
4. Explain application of diodes as rectifiers, clippers, clampers and regulators.
5. Analyze the various biasing circuits using BJTs & FETs.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF SEMICONDUCTORS 9 hours


Review of Band Theory of solids, intrinsic semiconductors, Direct and Indirect band-gap
semiconductors, carrier concentration in semiconductor, Drift and Diffusion current, Hall effect,
mobility and resistivity Generation and Recombination of electrons and holes. Thermal equilibrium,
Doped semiconductors n and p types, Fermi level and carrier concentrations of n and p type
semiconductors. Carrier mobility and conductivity, diffusion, Continuity equation

UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES 9 hours


Band structure of PN junction, current components, Quantitative theory of PN diode, Volt-ampere
characteristics and its temperature dependence, Narrow-base diode, Transition and diffusion
capacitance of P-N junction diodes, Breakdown of junctions on reverse bias, Zener and Avalanche
breakdowns, Tunnel diode and its V-I characteristics, The principles of photo diode, photo transistor,
LED & LCD.

UNIT III TRANSISTORS 9 hours


PNP and NPN junction transistors, Characteristics of the current flow across the base regions,
Minority and majority carrier profiles, Transistor as a device in CB, CE and CC configurations, and
their characteristics, Eber’s-Moll Model of BJT. JFET- Structure, operation, characteristics and
biasing - MOSFET- Structure, operation, MOS capacitor, characteristics and biasing – Types of
MOSFET

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF DIODES AND TRANSISTORS 9 hours


Diode circuits: half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers - filters, voltage multiplier, clipper circuits,
clamper circuits, Voltage regulator circuit using Zener diode.
Transistor amplifiers: BJT and MOS amplifiers
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V LOW FREQUENCY ANALYSIS OF TRANSISTOR 9 hours


AMPLIFIERS
Transistor as a two-port device and its Hybrid Model: Models for CB, CE, CC configurations and
their Interrelationship, Small signal analysis of BJT amplifiers, analysis of low frequency transistor
model, estimation of voltage gain, current gain, input resistance and output resistance. Small Signal
operation and model of MOSFET, Single stage MOSFET Amplifiers

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Understand the various charge carrier transport mechanisms in semiconductor materials and
devices.
2. Describe basic operation and characteristics of various semiconductor diodes.
3. Discuss basic operation and characteristics of various semiconductor transistors.
4. Describe the various applications of diodes and transistor circuits.
5. Analyse low-frequency and high-frequency models of BJTs and FETs.
6.
Text Books:
1. Adel S Sedra, Kenneth C Smith and Arun N Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits – Theory and
Applications”, Oxford University Press, 7th edition, 2017.
2. Robert L Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 11th edition, 2015.
Reference Books:
1. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuits – Analysis and Design”, McGraw Hill Education, 3rd
edition, 2006.
2. Albert Malvino and David Bates, Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education, 11th edition,
2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20ECE201 NETWORKS AND SIMULATION LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20EEE201

Course Description:
This course is designed to help the students to verify various network theorems, study transient
analysis of RLC circuits. Also design and analyse resonance circuits, two port network parameters and
filter circuits respectively.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand various network theorems.
2. Design circuits to verify various Network theorems: Superposition, Thevenin’s, Norton’s,
Millman’s theonem, Miller’s theorem, Reciprocity Theorem and Maximum Power Transfer
Theorem.
3. Design and verify series and parallel resonance circuits.
4. Design and analyze the two port networks.
5. Design filters with cut off frequencies.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.A) Verification of Kirchhoff’s Law.
B) Apply Mesh and Node Analysis Techniques for Solving Electrical Circuits.
2. Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity Theorem.
3.A) Verification of Thevenin’s and Norton Theorem.
B) Verification Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
4. Verification of Miller Theorem and Millman’s Theorem
5. Verification of Tell Egan’s Theorem
6. Design A Series RLC Circuit. Plot Frequency Response and Find Resonance Frequency,
Bandwidth, Q-Factor.
7. Design a Parallel RLC Circuit. Plot Frequency Response and Find Resonance Frequency,
Bandwidth, Q-Factor.
8.A) Design A RC Time Constant for A Given RC Circuit.
B) Design A RL Time Constant for A Given RL Circuit.
9.Design and analyse (settling time, overshoot, undershoot, etc.) step response of for a given series
RLC circuit for following cases:
i) ζ =1 (critically damped system)
ii) ζ =1 (critically damped system)
iii) ζ<1 (Under damped system)
Choose appropriate values of R, L, and C to obtain each of above cases one at a time.
10. Design and analyze Z, Y parameters of two-port network.
Design and analyze ABCD & h parameters of two-port network.
11.
Design a Constant-K, T and π section of low pass and high pass filters for the following cutoff
12.
frequency.
i)50 Hz
ii)30 kHz
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Apply various theorems to solve the networks.
2. Design and verify series and parallel resonance circuits.
3. Analyse responses of RL, RC and RLC circuits with different inputs.
4. Design and analyse two port networks using Z, Y, ABCD and h parameters.
5. Design filters for various cutoff frequencies

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20ECE202 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20EEE201

Course Description:
This course is designed to help the students to understand the basics of digital system design and its
implementation in Programmable logic devices using VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language). Also, to understand the FPGA based implementation for design verification. Further, the
implementation of different combinational and sequential logic designs using digital trainer kit will
also be taken into consideration using ICs.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand designing methodologies for combinational and sequential logic circuits.
2. Study and use of VHDL code for desired system modeling and simulation.
3. Design and verify combinational and sequential circuits using VHDL.
4. Implement digital systems using programmable logic devices (FPGAs)
5. Verify different combinational and sequential logic circuit functions using IC’s.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART A: EXPERIMENT USING 74 xx ICs
1. Logic gates using 74xx ICs
a) Verification of truth table of basic logic gates.
b) Realization of basic Logic gates using Universal Logic Gates (NAND/NOR).
c) Implementation of different Boolean functions
2. Binary Adders using 74 xx ICs
a) Half Adder
b) Full Adder
3. Binary Subtractors using 74 xx ICs
a) Half Subtractor
b) Full Subtractor
4. Decoder and Encoder Implementation
a) 3:8 decoder using IC 74138
b) 8:3 encoder using IC 74x148
5. Multiplexer and Demultiplexer
a) Realization of 8:1 Multiplexers using IC 74x151.
b) Realization of 2:4 Demultiplexer using IC 74139.
6. Latches and Flip Flops
a) Realization of D Latch using IC 7474.
b) Implementation of Master Slave JK Flip-Flop using IC 7476.
7. Realization of 4-bit comparators using IC 74x85.
8. Analysis of Decade counters using IC 74x90.
9. Implementation of universal shift registers using IC 74x194.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

PART B: EXPERIMENTS USING XILINX TOOL


10. Logic gates using Verilog HDL
a) Realization of basic logic gates.
b) Implementation of Universal logic gates (NAND/NOR)
11. Binary Half/Full Adder using VHDL
a) Gate Level Modeling.
b) Data Flow Modeling.
c) Behavioural Modeling.
12. Binary Half/Full subtractor using VHDL
a) Gate Level Modeling.
b) Data Flow Modeling.
c) Behavioural Modeling.
13. Realization of Full adder (substractor) using half adder (subtractor) in Verilog HDL using Data
Flow/Behavioural Modeling.
14. Design and realization of 3:8 Decoder in VHDL using Data Flow Modeling.
15. Design and realization 8:1 Multiplexer circuit using Structural Modeling and test bench.
16. Realization of SR and D Latch in Verilog HDL using Behavioural Modeling and test bench.
17. Realization of J K and D Flip Flop using Behavioural Modeling and test bench.
18. Design and Implementation of adder/subtractor circuits on FPGA board using Verilog HDL.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the functionality of digital systems.
2. Analyze and synthesize the digital modules at different abstraction levels.
3. Design and simulate various combinational circuits using VHDL.
4. Design and simulate various sequential circuits using VHDL.
5. Interpret the specifications of programmable logic devices and implement different logic
functionality on FPGA kit.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester


20ECE203 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20EEE201

Course Description:
This course is designed to help the students to understand the characteristics and frequency response
of semiconductor devices like p-n junctions, Zener diodes, BJTs, JFETs and MOSFET respectively.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the I-V characteristics of p-n junction, Zener diode, JFET and MOSFET
2. Learn the applications of p-n junction diode and Zener diode
3. Understand frequency response of CE and CC amplifiers
4. Simulate and understand the forward and reverse bias I-V characteristics of p-n junction diode,
and Zener diode as a voltage regulator (Line and load) using Multisim.
5. Simulate the frequency response of CE and CC amplifiers using Multisim.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Part-A (Hardware)
1. Forward and reverse bias I-V characteristics of p-n junction diode
2. Zener diode I-V characteristics of Zener diode.
3. Zener diode as a voltage regulator (Line and load).
4. Half and full wave rectifiers with and without RC filter.
5. Clipper and clamper circuits design and analysis.
6. Input and output characteristics of BJT in CB, CE, CC configuration.
7. JFET drain and transfer characteristics.
8. FET amplifier based on CS configuration.
9. MOSFET drain and transfer characteristics
10. Frequency response of CE and CC amplifier.
Part-B (Simulation)
11. Forward and reverse bias I-V characteristics of p-n junction diode using Multisim.
12. Zener diode I -V characteristics of Zener diode using Multisim.
13. Zener diode as a voltage regulator (Line and load) using Multisim.
14. Simulation of input and output characteristics of transistor in CB, CE and CC configuration using
Multisim
15. Simulation of frequency response of CE and CC amplifiers using Multisim.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyze the characteristics of electronic devices such as p-n junctions, Zener diodes, BJT,
JFETs and MOSFET
2. Analyze and design simple circuits like half-wave, full-wave rectifiers, clipper and clamping
circuits.
3. Analyse FET amplifier based on CS configuration
4. Measure frequency response of CE and CC amplifier.
5. Design and analyze of frequency response of CE and CC amplifiers using Multisim
Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Mandatory Course
B. Tech. II Year I Semester
20HUM901 INDIAN CONSTITUTION
L T P C
2 0 0 0
Pre-requisite NIL
Course Description:
The Constitution of India is the supreme law of India. Parliament of India can not make any law which
violates the Fundamental Rights enumerated under the Part III of the Constitution. The Parliament of
India has been empowered to amend the Constitution under Article 368, however, it cannot use this
power to change the “basic structure” of the constitution, which has been ruled and explained by the
Supreme Court of India in its historical judgments. The Constitution of India reflects the idea of
“Constitutionalism” – a modern and progressive concept historically developed by the thinkers of
“liberalism” – an ideology which has been recognized as one of the most popular political ideology
and result of historical struggles against arbitrary use of sovereign power by state.

Course Objectives:
The course is intended to:
1. To know about Indian constitution;
2. To know about central and state government functionalities in India; and
3. To know about Indian society.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6 hours


Historical Background – Constituent Assembly of India – Philosophical foundations of the Indian
Constitution – Preamble – Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy – Fundamental
Duties – Citizenship – Constitutional Remedies for citizens.

UNIT II STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF CENTRAL 6 hours


GOVERNMENT
Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – President – Vice
President – Prime Minister – Cabinet – Parliament – Supreme Court of India – Judicial Review.

UNIT III STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF STATE GOVERNMENT 6 hours


State Government – Structure and Functions – Governor – Chief Minister – Cabinet – State
Legislature –Judicial System in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts.

UNIT IV CONSTITUTION FUNCTIONS 6 hours


Indian Federal System – Center – State Relations – President’s Rule – Constitutional
Amendments –Constitutional Functionaries - Assessment of working of the Parliamentary System in
India.

UNIT V INDIAN SOCIETY 6 hours


Society: Nature, Meaning and definition; Indian Social Structure; Caste, Religion, Language in India
Constitutional Remedies for citizens – Political Parties and Pressure Groups; Right of Women,
Children and Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and other Weaker Sections.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Understand the functions of the Indian government; and
2. Understand and abide the rules of the Indian constitution.

Text Books:
1. Durga Das Basu, “Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi..
2. R.C.Agarwal, (1997) “Indian Political System”, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.
3 Maciver and Page, “ Society: An Introduction Analysis “, Mac Milan India Ltd., New Delhi.
4 K.L.Sharma, (1997) “Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes”, Jawaharlal Nehru
University, New Delhi.

Reference Books:
1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “ Introduction to the Constitution of India:, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi.
2 U.R.Gahai, “Indian Political System “, New Academic Publishing House, Jalaendhar.
3 R.N. Sharma, “Indian Social Problems “, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

II Year II Semester
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20MAT109 PROBABILITY THEORY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESSES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20MAT101, 20MAT107

Course Description:
Probability, conditional probability, Bayes theorem, random variables, mathematical expectation,
discrete and continuous distributions, joint distributions, random sequence, law of large numbers and
stochastic processes.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Introduce the probability concepts through sets, and apply the joint and conditional probability.
2. Study the probability distributions and their importance.
3. Solve the problems related to multivariate probability distributions.
4. Analyze the concept of random sequence and formulate joint distributions by using
transformation of random variables.
5. Apply the random processes to evolving in time or space analysis and applications to the signal
processing in the communication system.

UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 9 hours

Probability – Classical and introduced through sets, joint and conditional probability, independent
events, combined experiments and Bernoulli trials.

UNIT II ONE DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLE 9 hours


Random variable concept, distribution function, density function, Gaussian, binomial, Poisson,
uniform, exponential and Rayleigh distributions. Expected value of a random variable, moments,
characteristic function and moment generating function.

UNIT III MULTIPLE RANDOM VARIABLES 9 hours


Vector random variables, joint distribution function, joint density function and its properties,
conditional distribution and conditional density functions. Statistical independence, joint moments,
joint characteristic function.

UNIT IV TRANSFORMATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES AND 9 hours


RANDOM SEQUENCES
Jointly Gaussian random variables. Transformation of one and multiple random variables.
Chebychev’s inequality. Random sequences and modes of convergence (everywhere, almost
everywhere, probability, distribution and mean square); Limit theorems; Strong and weak laws of
large numbers, central limit theorem.

UNIT V RANDOM PROCESSES 9 hours


Random process, stationarity and independence, correlation functions, measurement of correlation
functions, Gaussian random processes. Power spectrum density and its properties. Linear system
fundamentals and random signal response of linear systems.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the concepts of Probability and their importance.
2. Study the one-dimensional random variable and Univariate probability distributions.
3. Evaluate the joint probability distributions and its applications in engineering problems.
4. Analyze characteristics of random sequences.
5. Apply the random processes and its applications to the signal processing in the communication
system.

Text Books:
Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles - Peyton Z. Peebles, TMH, 4th
1. edition, 2001.

Reference Books:
1. H. Stark and J. Woods, ``Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing,'' 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
2.A. Papoulis and S. Unnikrishnan Pillai, ``Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes,''
4th edition, McGraw-Hill.
3. K. L. Chung, Introduction to Probability Theory with Stochastic Processes, Springer International

4. S. Ross, Introduction to Stochastic Models, Harcourt Asia, Academic Press.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE104 CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
L T P C
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE101

Course Description:
compensator/controller design as per the system performance requirements. It covers the concept of
system modelling using first principle approach, system representation using transfer function, state
space, block diagram and signal flow graph, system analysis and compensator design in time domain
(using Routh-Hurwitz & Root locus method) and in frequency domain (using Bode, Polar and Nyquist
plots). Also, the course provides a foundation of modern control theory.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Gain knowledge of physical systems and processes, which can be utilized for their
mathematical modelling, analysis and control.
2. Understand standard test signals, transient and steady-state response, error constants and key
performance specifications in time and frequency domain.
3. Understand various control system stability analysis and design approaches.
4. Understand the frequency response analysis of control system.
5. Develop a basic foundation of modern control theory.

UNIT I CONTROL SYSTEMS - MODELLING AND 9 hours


REPRESENTATION
Introduction to Control Systems: Basic Concepts of Control Systems, Open loop and closed loop
systems, Practical examples, Mathematical modelling of physical systems, Introduction to control
system components: Actuators, Sensors, Transducers, Servo Mechanism/Tracking System,
Representation of linear systems using differential equations and transfer functions. Block diagram
and its reduction rules, Signal flow graph and Masson’s gain formula.

UNIT II TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS 9 hours


Transient and steady state response of feedback control systems, Time domain specifications, Location
of poles on s-plane and the transient response, Time response of first order systems, Time Response of
second order systems, Steady-state errors and error constants, Performance indices (IAE and ISE).

UNIT III STABILITY ANALYSIS AND CONTROLLER DESIGN 9 hours


Concept of system stability, Routh-Hurwitz stability criterion, Relative stability, Concept of root locus
and its procedure. Introduction to compensator and controllers, Lead and lag compensator, P, PI and
PID control actions

UNIT IV FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS 9 hours


Bode plot, Frequency-domain specifications, Correlation between time and frequency domain
specifications, Concept of stability and relative stability, All Pass and Minimum- Phase Systems,
Non-minimum phase system, Polar plots, Nyquist plots, Nyquist stability criterion.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V MODERN CONTROL THEORY 9 hours


Introduction to state variables and state space models of linear systems, State transition matrix,
Solution of state equations (homogenous and non-homogenous), Concept of Controllability &
Observability
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Apply the knowledge of basic sciences to represent a variety of physical systems using
mathematical and graphical models.
2. Describe the system behaviour in terms of various performance parameters and apply controller
design methodologies to study and improve the dynamic behaviour of the system.
3. Analyse control systems to investigate the stability and relative stability.
4. Analyse the frequency response of control systems.
5. Analyse control systems using modern control theory.

Text Books:
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Prentice Hall, 12th
edition,2011.
2. Nagrath, I J and Gopal, M. “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 6th
edition, 2017.
Reference Books:
1. Kuo, B.C. and Golnaraghi, F. “Automatic Control System”, John Wiley and Son’s, 9th
edition,2010.
2. Ogata, K. “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 5th edition, 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE105 PRINCIPLES OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
L T P C
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisite 20MAT101

Course Description:
The course will provide strong foundation on signals and systems which will be useful for creating
foundation of communication and signal processing. The course covers theory and methods to
develop expertise in time-domain as well as in frequency domain approaches to the investigation of
continuous and discrete systems. Student will understand application of various transforms for
analysis of signals and systems both continuous time and discrete time.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study the mathematical description and representation of discrete and continuous
signals and systems.
2. Obtain the response of an LTI system and convert a continuous-time signal to the
discrete-time using sampling.
3. Study the frequency domain analysis of continuous time and discreate-time signals and
systems using Fourier transform.
4. Analyze the continuous-time systems using Laplace transform.
5. Analyze the discrete-time systems using z-transform.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9 hours


Signals – Continuous-time (CT) & Discrete-Time (DT) signals –Basic CT & DT Signals, Signal
Operations, Representation of signals in terms of impulse function, Classification of CT &DT Signals:
- Energy and power signals, Even and Odd signals, Periodic and Aperiodic signals, –– Systems –
Classifications of CT & DT systems: – static & dynamic, causal & non-causal, linear & non-linear,
time variant & time invariant, and stable & unstable systems. Application of signal and systems in
various field of engineering.

UNIT II LINEAR TIME INVARIANT (LTI) SYSTEMS 9 hours


LTI Systems, Properties of LTI systems – causality and stability. Convolution and its properties,
Convolution Integral of CT-LTI systems, Convolution sum of DT-LTI systems (tabular and graphical
methods), Unit impulse response and unit step response of LTI systems. The Sampling theorem and
its implications- Spectra of sampled signals. Reconstruction: Aliasing and its effects, Nyquist rate and
Nyquist interval.

UNIT III FOURIER ANALYSIS FOR PERIODIC AND APERIODIC 9 hours


SIGNALS
Fourier series representation of a continuous time periodic signal: Trigonometric and Complex
exponential and their relation. Continuous Time Fourier Transform (CTFT), magnitude and phase
response, properties of CTFT, Fourier series representation of a discrete time periodic signal: Discrete
Fourier series (DFS), Th Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) and its properties.

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNAL AND 9 hours


SYSTEMS USING LAPLACE TRANSFORM
The Laplace Transform of continuous time signals and systems, relation between Laplace and Fourier
transform, region of convergence, poles and zeros of system. Laplace transform of some common
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

signals, properties of Laplace transform, properties of region of convergence. Inverse Laplace


transform, Laplace domain analysis of continuous time LTI system.

UNIT V ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNAL AND SYSTEMS 9 hours


USING Z TRANSFORM
The z-Transform of discrete time signals and systems, region of convergence, z-transform of some
common sequences, properties of Z transform, properties of region of convergence. Inverse z-
transform: distinct pole and repeated-pole system. Z - domain analysis for discrete-time systems,
system function analysis of discrete-time LTI.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals and classifications of signals & systems.
2. Analyse the LTI systems using convolution and concept of sampling.
3. Represent periodic and aperiodic signals in the frequency domain using Fourier
transforms.
4. Analyse the continuous time system behaviour using the Laplace Transform.
5. Analyse the discrete time system behaviour using the z-Transform.

Text Books:
1. Alan V Oppenheim, Alan S Willsky and S Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, PHI Learning
Private Limited, 2nd edition, 2010.
2. Douglas K. Lindner, “Introduction to Signals and Systems”, McGraw Hill International ISE
edition, 1999.
Reference Books:
1. Haykin. S and Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd edition, 2012.
2. Lathi, B. P, “Signal Processing and Linear Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1998.
3. Hsu.H.P and Rakesh Ranjan, “Signals and Systems- Schaums‘s Outlines”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2nd edition, 2010.
4. Samir S. Soliman and Mandyam Dhati Srinath, “Continuous and Discrete Signals and
Systems”, Prentice-Hall International, 2nd edition, 2011.
5. Luis F. Chaparro, “Signals and Systems Using MATLAB”, Academic Press-An Imprint of
Elsevier, 1st edition, 2011.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE106 ANALOG CIRCUITS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE103

Course Description:
This course provides a basic knowledge on differential amplifier, designing feedback amplifier,
oscillator circuits, Op-Amp applications and special function IC’s.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study the basics of differential amplifiers.
2. Understand the basics of feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
3. Realize the basic operations and configurations of operational amplifiers.
4. Design and develop the important applications of operational amplifier
5. Study special function ICs and its applications.

UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL AND POWER AMPLIFIERS 9 hours

Differential amplifiers: Operation of BJT and MOS differential amplifiers and its small signal
equivalent circuit analysis, MOS differential amplifier with active load, Basic MOS current mirror
circuits, MOS current mirror circuits with improved performance. Steering circuits.
Power amplifiers: Class A, Class B, Class AB and Class C, estimation of power efficiency.

UNIT II FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9 hours


Feedback amplifiers: Basics of feedback, positive and negative feedback. Properties of negative
feedback, Feedback topologies, series-shunt, shunt-series, series-series, shunt-shunt. Analysis of
feedback voltage amplifiers.
Oscillators: Barkhausen criteria, RC oscillators: Phase-shift and Wien bridge oscillators, LC oscillators:
Hartley and Colpitts oscillators, Crystal oscillator.

UNIT III OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9 hours


Block diagram and symbol of op-amp, Ideal op-amp, differential gain, common-mode gain and CMRR,
Inverting and non-inverting configurations, Practical op-amp: Input offset voltage, input bias current,
input offset current, slew rate. Summing and difference amplifiers, basic and practical integrators and
basic and practical differentiators, voltage follower.

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER 9 hours


Log and antilog amplifiers, Comparators, Schmitt trigger and derivation of the hysteresis voltage.
Active filters: low-pass, high-pass, band-pass, band-stop and all-pass filters. Precision rectifiers:
Half-wave and full wave. Instrumentation amplifiers

UNIT V SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs 9 hours


IC Voltage regulators –Linear regulators and switching regulators. Fixed (78XX and 79XX) and
adjustable voltage regulators (IC 723). - Monolithic switching regulator, 555 Timer: Functional
block diagram, astable and monostable mode of operations, Voltage controlled oscillator (VCO),
Phase locked loop (PLL), Monolithic PLL IC 565, applications of PLL
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the operation of differential and power amplifier.
2. Design the feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits.
3. Analyze the characteristics of operational amplifier
4. Design of operational amplifier based circuits for various applications.
5. Analyse the applications of special function ICs.

Text Books:
1. Sedra, A. S. and Smith, K. C “Micro Electronic Circuits”, Oxford University Press, 6th edition,
2011.
2. Ramakant, A. and Gayakwad, “Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, Pearson, 4th edition,
2015.
Reference Books:
1. Roy Choudhry, D and Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 4th edition, 2018.
2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford University Press, 5th edition, 2008.

3. Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, McGraw Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2017.

4. Razavi, “Fundamentals of Microelectronics”, John Wiley, 2nd edition, 2013.

5. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
Education, 11th edition, 2015.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE107 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE102

Course Description:
This course provides the detailed review of 8086 microprocessor, its architecture, addressing modes,
instruction set, bus structure and I/O Interfacing. It also describes the 8051 microcontroller, and ARM
microcontroller with deeper insights on instruction sets, addressing modes, interfacing, and
programming for real-life applications.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the 8086-microprocessorarchitecture and its programming
2. Analyze 8086 microprocessor interfacing with various peripherals.
3. Understand the 8051-microcontroller and its programming.
4. Understand the RISC architecture of ARM microcontroller
5. Develop program for applications involving 8051/ARM microcontrollers

UNIT I 8086 MICROPROCESSORS 9 hours

Introduction to 8086 – 8086 Microprocessor architecture – Instruction set - Addressing modes-


Assembler directives – Assembly language programming, Introduction to advanced processors.

UNIT II INTERFACING WITH 8086 9 hours


Memory interfacing- Parallel communication interface- Timer – Keyboard /display controller –
Interrupt controller – DMA controller- Assembly language programming related to the above
interfacing

UNIT III 8051 MICROCONTROLLERS 9 hours


Architecture of 8051 – Special Function Registers (SFRs) – Instruction set – Addressing modes –
Assembly language programming involving I/O Ports –8051Timers – Serial Ports – Interrupts.

UNIT IV ARM MICROCONTROLLER 9 hours


The RISC design philosophy- ARM Architecture fundamentals- ARM Instruction Set - Thumb
Instruction set – ARM Assembly Language Programming – C programming – Optimizing ARM
Assembly Code.

UNIT V APPLICATION PROGRAMMING 9 hours


Introduction to Proteus simulator, 8051/ARM based Interfacing design and programming for
applications such as: Keypad – LCD display - Seven segment display - Digital clock – Stepper motor
control – ADC/DAC– Traffic light control – Use serial communication facility to send/receive
messages – Use interrupt facility to monitor and service real-time events.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the 8086-microprocessorarchitecture, instructions set and programming
2. Analyse 8086 microprocessor interfacing with various peripherals.
3. Understand the 8051-microcontroller, instruction set, addressing modes and programming
4. Understand the RISC architecture fundamentals and programming of ARM microcontroller
5. Develop program for applications involving 8051/ARM microcontrollers
Text Books:
1. Doughlas V.Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, McGraw Hill
Education, 2012
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and RolinMcKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller
and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C”, Pearson Education, 2nd edition, , 2011.
Reference Books:
1. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer's Guide:
Designing and Optimizing System Software” Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2004
2. Senthil Kumar. N, Saravanan. M and Jeevananthan. S, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”,
Oxford University Press, 2nd edition. 2016.
3. Kenneth J. Ayala, “The 8086 Microprocessor- Programming & Interfacing The PC”, Cenage
Learning, 1st edition, 2007.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE204 SIMULATION AND CONTROL LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE101

Course Description:
This course helps the students to analyze in depth the signals and systems in time, frequency and z -
domains respectively. It is expected that student should acquire familiarity with mathematical
representation of signals and systems. This course also provides simulation of signals and exposure to
control systems using MATLAB and Simulink.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to

1. Understand the representation of continuous and discrete time signals and systems in time
domain.
2. Study and analyse frequency domain versions of different systems along with their
Characteristics.
3. Know the concepts of Laplace transform and z-Transform, analysis of properties and
characterization of LTI systems.
4. Study the error compensation by numerical analysis using MATLAB and understanding the
effect of PID Controller on system response.
5. Analyse stability of a given Linear Time Invariant System, various control systems using
MATLAB.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to MATLAB and basic Operations on Matrices.
2. Write a program to generate various signals and sequences and perform operations like addition,
multiplication, scaling, shifting, and folding.
3. Write a program to verify the linearity and time-variant property of a systems.
4. Write a program to find the convolution of Continuous Time and Discrete Time Signals.
5. Write a MATLAB program to implement Fourier series.
6. Write a MATLAB program to implement Continuous Time Fourier Transform (CTFT) and
Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT).
7. Write a MATLAB program to Implement Laplace Transform and z-Transform.
8. Write a program to verify and observe Sampling Theorem using MATLAB.
9. Modelling of a DC motor and validation of its characteristics using Simulink
10. To find the effect of P, PI and PID controller on first order and second order system.
11. Stability Analysis (Bode, Root Locus, Nyquist) of Linear Time Invariant System.
12. State space model for classical transfer function using MATLAB.
13. To Study the Frequency Response of Analog Filters Using MATLAB.
14. Write a program to do the analysis of sampling rate conversion system
(a) Interpolation by a factor L
(b) Decimation by a factor M
(c) Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor (L/M)
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

15. Write a program to find out DFT of a sequence.


16. Write a program to obtain the magnitude and phase response of finite duration DT sequences
using N-point FFT algorithm.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyze the properties of different types of signals and systems in time domain.
2. Understand the frequency domain analysis of different systems along with their Characteristics.
3. Apply the Laplace transforms and Z transform for analysing the LTI system and also verify the
sampling theorem.
4. Design and verify PID Controller, and effect of feedback on first order and second order systems.
5. Analyze stability of a given LTI system and various control systems using MATLAB.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE205 ANALOG CIRCUITS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE103

Course Description:
This course provides hands on experience to students on design and implementation various circuits
using operational amplifiers 741 and MULTISIM.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Gain hands on experience in designing electronic circuits
2. Learn simulation software used in circuit design
3. Learn the fundamental principles of amplifier circuits
4. Differentiate feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
5. Differentiate the operation of various multi-vibrators.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Design and Implementation of the following Circuits using Hardware and Multisim
1.Study of voltage feedback amplifiers and trans-conductance amplifiers
2.Design and implementation of differential and summing amplifier using op-amps
3.Design and test inverting and non-inverting amplifiers using op-amps
4.Measurement of input offset voltage, input bias current and input offset current, slew rate of op-amp
5.Design and test RC phase-shift oscillator and Wien bridge oscillator
6.Design and test Hartley oscillator and Colpitts oscillator
7.Design and implementation of active LPF, HPF and band-pass filter
8.Design and test integrator and differentiator circuits using op-amp
9.Measurement of gain of instrumentation amplifier using op-amp
Design and test astable and monostable multivibrators using 555 timers
10.
Voltage regulator using IC 78XX, IC 79XX, IC 723
11.
Comparator and Schmitt trigger circuit using op-amp
12.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Measure input offset voltage, slew rate of op-amp
2. Design and implement various applications of op-amp
3. Design and implement astable and monostable multivibrator using 555 timers
4. Implement Fixed and adjustable voltage regulator
5. Implement above circuits using MULTISIM Tool

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester


20ECE206 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE102, 20ECE103

Course Description:
This laboratory course is designed to help the students understand and practise the assembly/C
language programming of 8086-microprocessor, 8051 and ARM-microcontrollers. Further this course
provides hands on experience on designing and interfacing of various peripherals with the 8086-
microprocessor, 8051 and ARM-microcontrollers.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Gain hands on experience in writing assembly language programs for 8086- microprocessor.
2. Learn interface various peripheral chips to 8086-microprocessor.
3. Learn the basic operation of various Peripherals
4. Gain hands on experience in writing assembly language programs for 8051-microcontroller.
5. Learn about designing and implementing 8051 and ARM microcontroller-based systems.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
8086 Microprocessor Experiments:
1. Assembly Language Program to perform Arithmetic operations
2. Assembly Language Program to perform array operation- Searching and Sorting
3. Assembly Language Program to perform String operations - Move block, Reverse string, String
comparison, Length of string
4. Assembly Language Program to perform Code conversions–Hexadecimal to Decimal and vice-
versa, Grey code to Binary and vice-versa
5. Reading and Writing data using parallel ports of 8255 PPI.
6. Interfacing of 8279 Keyboard / Display controller to display a string message
8051 Microcontroller Experiments:
7. Assembly Language Program to perform Arithmetic operations
8. Assembly Language Program for Largest/Smallest of an Array
9. Interfacing of Traffic Light Controller with 8051microcontroller.
10. Interfacing of ADC/DAC
ARM Microcontroller Experiments:
11. Interfacing of Stepper Motor for running in forward and reverse direction
12. Interfacing of LCD to display Digital clock
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Develop assembly language programs using 8086 microprocessors.
2. Design and interface peripherals with 8086 microprocessors.
3. Understand the basic operation of Peripherals.
4. Develop assembly language programs using 8051 microcontrollers.
5. Design 8051/ARM microcontroller-based systems.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Mandatory Course
B. Tech. II Year II Semester
20CHE901 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

L T P C
2 0 0 0
Pre-requisite Basic knowledge about sciences up to intermediate
or equivalent level.

Course Description:
The course deals with basic concepts of environment, its impact on human, universe, consumption of
energy sources, effects, controlling methods for pollution and the environmental ethics to be followed
by human beings.

Course Objectives:
1. To make the students aware about the environment and its inter-disciplinary nature and to
emphasize the importance of the renewable energy sources.
2. To familiarize the concept of Ecosystem and their importance.
3. To bring the awareness among students about the importance of biodiversity and the need for
its conservation.
4. To make the students understand the adverse effects of environmental pollution, its causes and
measures to control it.
5. To introduce the environmental ethics and emphasize the urgency of rain water harvesting
along with water shed management.

UNIT I MULTIDISCIPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL 6 hours


STUDIES
Definition, Scope and Importance – Need for Public Awareness. Renewable energy Resources: Solar
energy - solar cells, wind energy, tidal energy. Non-renewable energy resources: LPG, water gas,
producer gas. Overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture – fertilizer and pesticides.

UNIT II ECOSYSTEMS 6 hours


Concept of an ecosystem. Structure – functions – Producers, Consumers and Decomposers –
Ecological succession – Food chains, Food webs and Ecological pyramids – Introduction, types,
characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystems: Forest, Desert and Lake.

UNIT III BIODIVERSITY AND ITS CONSERVATION 6 hours


Introduction, Definition: Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical and
aesthetic values. Biogeographical zones of India. Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of
wildlife, Endangered and Endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6 hours


Definition, Cause, effects and control measures of pollution – Air, Water, Soil and Noise. Solid Waste
Management: Effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6 hours


Urban problems related to Water conservation, rain water harvesting and watershed management;
Climate changes: global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents. Case Studies:
Population growth, variation among nations and population explosion.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to acquire
1. Ability to understand the natural environment, its relationship with human activities and need
of the day to realize the importance of the renewable energy sources.
2. The knowledge of various ecosystems and their importance along with the concepts of food
chains, food webs and ecological pyramids.
3. Familiarity with biodiversity, its importance and the measures for the conservation of
biodiversity.
4. The knowledge about the causes, effects and controlling methods for environmental pollution,
along with disaster management and solid waste management.
5. Awareness about the sustainable development, environmental ethics, social issues arising due
to the environmental disorders.

Text Books:
1. Text book of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses by Erach Bharucha for
University Grants Commission, Universities Press, 2005.
2. Environmental Studies by R. J. Ranjith Daniels and Jagdish Krishnaswamy, (Wiley Re- print
version 2014).
3. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering/C.N. Sawyer, P.L. McCarty, G.F. Parkin
(TataMcGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2003).
4. Environmental Chemistry by B.K. Sharma, (Goel Publishing House, 2014).
5. Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph (TataMcGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2009).

Reference Books:
1. Environmental Science & Engineering by Dr. A. Ravikrishnan, Hitech Publishing Company
Pvt. Ltd. 2013.
2 Perspectives in Environmental Studies, Second edition, Anubha Koushik and C.P. Koushik,
New Age International (P) Limited, Publishers, 2004.
3 R.N. Sharma, “Indian Social Problems “, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

III Year I Semester


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE108 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS AND TRANSMISSION LINES
L T P C
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisite 20MAT101, 20PHY102

Course Description:
The course will provide strong foundation on vector algebra, Vector Calculus, waves in dielectric and
conducting media, wave polarization, wave reflection, refraction, transmission lines which will be
useful for creating foundation of communication with wave phenomena. The course covers theory
and methods to develop expertise in EM field and transmission line approaches associated with it.
Student will understand application EM waves and transmission lines.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand how formulae are related to solve problems and identify the keywords in a given law
which is essential for the application of the law and solve many problems.
2. Understand the Static electrostatic field.
3. Understand the Magnetostatic field.
4. Study different EM wave propagation.
5. Understand the Transmission line parameter analysis.

UNIT I ELECTROSTATICS 9 hours


Introduction Coulomb's Law, Electric Fields due to Continuous Charge Distributions, Electric Flux
Density, Gauss's Law-Maxwell's Equation, Applications of Gauss's Law, Electric Potential,
Relationship between E and V -Maxwell's Equation, Electric Dipole and Flux Lines, Energy Density
in Electrostatic Fields, Polarization in Dielectrics, Continuity Equation and Relaxation Time,
Boundary conditions at electric interfaces, Method of images and its applications.

UNIT II MAGNETOSTATICS 9 hours


Biot-Savart's Law, Ampere's Circuit Law—Maxwell's Equation, Applications of Ampere's Law,
Magnetic Flux Density—Maxwell's Equation, Maxwell's Equations for Static EM Fields, Magnetic
Scalar and Vector Potentials, Forces due to Magnetic Fields on moving charge and current element,
Magnetic Torque and Moment, Magnetic Dipole, Magnetization in Materials, Classification of
Magnetic Materials, Magnetic Boundary Conditions, Inductors and Inductances, Magnetic Energy.

UNIT IV MAXWELL'S EQUATIONS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC 9 hours


WAVE PROPAGATION
Faraday's Law of Induction, Transformer and Motional EMFs, Displacement Current and
Displacement Current Density, Maxwell's Equations for Time-Varying field, Maxwell's Equations
for Time-Harmonic Fields, EM Waves equation and Solution of EM Wave equation, Wave
Propagation in different medium (Lossy Dielectrics, Lossless Dielectrics, Free Space and Good
Conductors), Power and Poynting Vector, Reflection of a Plane Wave at Normal Incidence, EM
Wave Polarization.

UNIT IV TRANSMISSION LINES 9 hours


Introduction Transmission Line, Distributed Parameters of Transmission Line, Transmission Line
Equations and Solution, Physical Interpretation of Voltage and Current Solutions, Primary &
Secondary Constants, Lossless and Distortion Less Transmission Line, Loading and Different
Methods of Loading, Input Impedance, Reflection Co-Efficient, Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR),
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V TRANSMISSION ANALYSIS 9 hours


Impedance Matching Techniques, Impedance Matching With Single and Double Stub Impedance
Matching. Introduction to Smith Chart , Matching Using Smith Chart.
Introduction to Network Parameters, Z-Parameters, Y-Parameters and S-Parameters
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals of vector analysis and vector calculus with introduction to
maxwell’s relation.
2. Analyze the Electrostatic Field in vacuum or free space.
3. Analyze the static magnetostatic Field.
4. Analyze the EM wave propagation in different media.
5. Analyze the transmission line equation, characteristic quantities, use of smith chart and various
application of transmission line.

Text Book(s)
1. N.O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics,” Oxford Univ. Press, 4th ed., 2008.

2. E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems –PHI, 2nd
Edition, 2000
Reference Books
1. J. D Krauss et.al. “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, TMH 4th edition, 2010.

2. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Kenneth S. Krane Physics, Vol. 2, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
Fifth edition, 2002.
3. Matthew. William H. Hayt Jr. and John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics,” TMH, 7th
ed., 2006
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE109 ANALOG COMMUNICATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE105

Course Description:
The objectives of this course is to introduce the fundamental principles and mathematical model to
analyse and design of analog communication systems. Topics include: signal representation in both
time and frequency domain, transmission of signal through LTI System, autocorrelation and power
spectral density, time and frequency domain analysis of analog continuous wave modulation and
demodulation, frequency division multiplexing, performance analysis continuous wave modulation
techniques in additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) channel, verifications of sampling theorem,
analog pulse modulation techniques, concepts of pulse code modulation, information theory, entropy,
source coding, discrete memoryless channel and channel coding techniques.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to

1. Understand the transmission of random signal both in time and frequency domain.
2. Analyse various amplitude modulation and demodulation techniques.
3. Evaluate the performance of angle modulation and demodulation in the presence of noise.
4. Understand sampling theorem and various analog pulse modulation techniques.
5. Understand the concepts of information theory, source coding and channel coding techniques.

UNIT I RANDOM PROCESS FOR COMMUNICATION 9 hours

Elements of an electrical communication system, Characteristics of communication channel and their


mathematical modeling, Signal models: deterministic and random, Random variable, Random
Process, Mean and Variance of random process, Stationary Processes, Ergodic Processes,
Transmission through LTI, Principles and properties of Autocorrelation and cross correlation, Power
spectral density. Gaussian process, White process, Central Limit Theorem.

UNIT II AMPLITUDE MODULATION SYSTEMS 9 hours


Amplitude modulation: Concepts of Modulation, Continuous wave (CW) modulation: amplitude
modulation (AM) - double sideband (DSB); double sideband suppressed carrier (DSBSC); single
sideband suppressed carrier (SSBSC) and vestigial sideband (VSB) modulation and demodulation.
Noise: External and internal sources of noise, Thermal noise, Representation of narrowband noise;
receiver model- Tuned radio frequency receiver, Superheterodyne receiver, signal to noise ratio
(SNR), noise figure, Noise temperature, Equivalent noise bandwidth, Noise in Amplitude Modulation:
DSB-SC, SSB-SC and AM system,

UNIT III ANGLE MODULATION SYSTEMS 9 hours


Angle modulation: Concepts of Instantaneous frequency and phase, phase modulation (PM) &
frequency modulation (FM) and demodulation; Bandwidth of FM, Wideband and Narrowband FM,
Concept of Frequency division multiplexing.
Noise in angle modulation systems: Noise in FM and PM, Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis in FM,
Threshold effect in angle modulation.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT IV ANALOG PULSE MODULATION SCHEMES 9 hours


Sampling process, sampling theorem, signal reconstruction, flat-top sampling of band pass signals,
Analog Pulse Modulation, Types of analog pulse modulation, Method of generation and detection
of PAM, PWM, PPM, Spectra of pulse modulation, concepts of pulse code modulation.

UNIT V INFORMATION THEORY & CHANNEL CAPACITY 9 hours


Measure of information, Entropy, Source Coding Theorem, Hamming weight and distance, Syndrome
Coding, Shannon Fano and Huffman Coding, Discrete memory less channels, Channel Coding, Error
Control Codes, Linear block code and convolutional codes, Nyquist bandwidth, Shannon-Hartley
capacity theorem.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to

1. Analyze the transmission of random signal both in time and frequency domain.
2. Analyze the amplitude modulation and demodulation techniques in communication systems
3. Analyze the angle modulation and demodulation techniques in communication systems
4. Understand the concepts of anlog pulse modulation.
5. Use source and channel coding technique to improve system performance.
Text Book(s)
1. Simon Haykin & Michael Moher, Communication Systems, John Wiley & Sons, 5th Edition,
2010.
2. B. P. Lathi and Z. Ding, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 4th edition,
Oxford , 2011
Reference Books
1. H Taub & D. Schilling, Gautam Sahe, Principles of Communication Systems, 3rd Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2007
2.
H.P. Hsu, Analog and Digital Communication, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE110 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
L T P C
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE105
Course Description:
This course gives background and fundamental material for the analysis and processing of
digital signals. Various mathematical tools such DFT and FFT are explained followed by its
application in transform domain analysis of LTI system. Furthermore, the detailed design and
structures of FIR and IIR systems are discussed for low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band stop
filtering application. Subsequently, discussed about architectures and programmability of digital
signal processor. Finally, concepts of multirate are discussed for audio and speech applications of DSP
in real time.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Develop knowledge in efficient transforms in the frequency domain and analyze their
properties
2. Study the designs and structures of digital (IIR) filter from analysis to synthesis for a given
specifications.
3. Study the designs and structures of digital (FIR) filter from analysis to synthesis for a given
specifications.
4. Acquire knowledge about real time implementation of various digital signal processing
algorithms in DSP hardware.
5. Discuss application areas with particular stress on audio and speech data.

UNIT I FREQUENCY DOMAIN TOOLS FOR SIGNAL PROCESSING 9 hours


IN DIGITAL DOMAIN
Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT): Concept of Frequency domain sampling and reconstruction of
discrete time Signals, Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT as a Linear Transformation, and Relationship
of DFT to other transforms, Properties of DFT, Use of DFT in linear filtering, filtering long data
sequences: overlap-save, overlap-add method.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithms: Direct computation of DFT, Radix-2 FFT algorithm:
Decimation-in-time algorithm, Decimation-in-frequency algorithm.

UNIT II INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE (IIR) FILTER DESIGN 9 hours


Analog Filters: Concept of Filtering, Analog filter specifications, Classification of Analog filters:
Butterworth and Chebyshev Approximations, Design of Analog Filters (Low pass, High pass, Band
pass, Band stop Filters) using Frequency transformations.
Simple Digital Filters: Concept of Digital Domain Filtering, 1st order FIR Lowpass, High pass Filters,
2nd order FIR Bandpass, Band stop Filters, 1st order IIR Lowpass, High pass Filters, 2nd order IIR
Bandpass, Band stop Filters, FIR All Pass Filters, IIR All Pass Filters, Digital Filter Specification
Digital IIR Filters Design: Design of Digital IIR Filter (Low pass, High pass, Band pass, Band stop
Filters) using Impulse Invariant, Bilinear Transformation Techniques.
Realization of IIR filters: Direct form (I and II), Cascade, Parallel (I and II), and Transposed
structures for realizing IIR Filters

UNIT III FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE (FIR) FILTER DESIGN 9 hours


Digital FIR Filters: Concept of FIR Filtering, Linear Phase Transfer Functions – Type I, Type II
Type III and Type IV Transfer Functions, Design of Linear Phase FIR Filters using Frequency
Sampling, Windowing Methods.
Finite word length effects: Quantization of input signal, filter coefficient, Round-off effect in digital
filters.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Realization of FIR Filters: Direct form structures, cascade form structures and lattice structures for
realizing FIR filters

UNIT IV DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR 9 hours


Introduction to DSP Processor: Basics of Programmable DSP Architecture – Von-Neumann,
Harvard, Super Harvard, VLIW Architecture, and Numeric Representation in DSP Processor – Fixed
Point and Floating-Point Representation.
TMS320C6713 Processor: Architecture, Pipelining, Linear and Circular Addressing Modes,
Instruction sets, Assembler Directives, Interrupts, Memory Considerations, Implementation of FIR
and IIR filters.

UNIT V MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 9 hours


Sampling Rate Conversion: Basic Sampling Rate Conversion Tools – Up-Sampler, Down-Sampler,
Time Domain and Frequency Domain Characterization of Up-Sampler and Down-Sampler, Multirate
Structure for Sampling Rate Conversion - Decimator, Interpolator, Cascade Equivalences, Fractional
Sampling Rate Conversion, Concept of Multistage Sampling Rate Conversion, Polyphase
Decomposition for Efficient Realization of Interpolator and Decimator Structure.
Application of Multirate DSP: Design of Phase Shifters, Sub-band Coding of Speech Signals using
Quadrature Mirror Filters

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand different types of mathematical tools such as DFT, FFT and use them in analyzing
discrete time signals in transform domain.
2. Design Digital IIR filters to meet desired frequency response specification for low-pass, high-
pass, band-pass and band-stop filtering application and Realize the designed filters using
Direct, Cascade, Parallel and Transpose Structures.
3. Design Digital FIR filters to meet desired frequency response specification for low-pass, high-
pass, band-pass and band-stop filtering application and Realize the designed filters using
Direct, Cascade, and Lattice Structures.
4. Acquire basic knowledge on DSP processors architecture and programmability of
TMS320C6713 Digital Signal Processor.
5. Understand basic concepts on Multirate Structures for Sampling Rate Conversion and Apply
them in Phase Shifter Design and Subband-Coding of Speech Signal

Text Book(s)
1. J. G. Proakis, D. G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education Asia/Prentice Hall of India, 2014.
2. Rulph Chassaing, Donald Reay, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with
TMS320C6713 and TMS320C6416 DSK”, 2 nd Edition, Wiley India, 2014.
Reference Books
1. S. K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing: A Computer based Approach”, 4th Edition, McGraw
Hill, 2013.
2. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng S. Gan, “Digital Signal Processors – Architectures, Implementations
and Applications”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005.
3. Emmanuel Ifeachor, Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach”, 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE207 ANALOG COMMUNICATION LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE105

Course Description:
This laboratory course is designed to help the students to analyse various analog modulation and
demodulation techniques and frequency division multiplexing. Students also analyse sampling
theorem, various pulse modulation and demodulation techniques, frequency synthesizer and mixer
used in analog communication systems.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand how signals are amplitude modulated and demodulated in the transmitter and
receiver, respectively, in analog communication.
2. Understand how signals are frequency modulated and demodulated in the transmitter and
receiver, respectively, in analog communication
3. Understand how more than one signals are Frequency-Division multiplexed in the
transmitter and how it is demultiplexed in the receiver so that the signal reaches to the
intended user at the destination.
4. Understand how analog signals are converted into pulses of varying characteristics in
communication
5. Understand the effect of noise communication in analog communication.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation


2. DSB-SC Modulation and Demodulation
3. SSB-SC Modulation and Demodulation
4. Frequency Modulation and Demodulation
5. Study of spectrum analyzer and analysis of AM and FM Signals
Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis Filter
6.
7. Frequency Division Multiplexing & De multiplexing
8 Sampling and Reconstruction
Pulse Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation
9.
Pulse Width Modulation & Demodulation
10.
Pulse Position Modulation & Demodulation
11.
12. Design and analysis of analog RC filter using MATLAB
Study and simulation of signals in the presence of noise using MATLAB
13.
Analysis of Linear Block Codes using MATLAB
14
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyse various amplitude modulation and demodulation techniques
2. Analyse frequency modulation and demodulation
3. Apply Frequency Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing for communication
4. Analyse pulse modulation techniques, such as PAM, PWM, PPM
5. Analyse analog communication system in the presence of noise.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE208 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE105

Course Description:
This course is designed to help the students in implementing basic DSP algorithms in MATLAB
and then using DSP processor. This laboratory starts with the simulation of Magnitude and Phase
Spectrum analysis using DFT is demonstrated. Subsequently, design of IIR and FIR filters is illustrated
for low-pass and high-pass filtering, which is followed by demonstration of Interpolator and
Decimator implementation for Multirate DSP system analysis. Finally, as an application of DSP,
design of digital filter for noise suppression is illustrated.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering: Construction of
tools for visualizing the basic concepts of discrete signal representation such as Fourier
transforms, discrete time representations.
2. Design and implementations of IIR and FIR filtering algorithms and structures.
3. Understand the concept of Multi-rate signal processing and sample rate conversion
4. Understand the basics of using DSP chips to perform real-time digital signal processing.
5. Develop and Implement DSP algorithms in software using CCS with DSP floating point
Processor.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
MATLAB / EQUIVALENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
1. Spectrum Analysis using Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
2. Implementation of DIT-FFT and DIF-FFT algorithm to compute DFT coefficients of DT signals
3. Design of Analog (Butterworth and Chebyshev) Filters for Lowpass and Highpass Filtering
Application
4. Design of Digital IIR Filters using Impulse Invariant and Bilinear Transformation Techniques
for Lowpass and Highpass Filtering Application
5. Realize Digital IIR Filter Transfer Function using Direct, Cascade, Parallel Structures
6. Design of Digital FIR Filters using Frequency Sampling and Windowing Techniques for
Lowpass and Highpass Filtering Application
7. Realize Digital FIR Filter Transfer Function using Direct, Cascade, Lattice Structures
8. Implement Multirate Structures for Sampling Rate Conversion (Interpolation, Decimation,
Fractional Sampling Rate Conversion)
DSP PROCESSOR BASED IMPLEMENTATION
1. Real Time Signal Generation using TMS320c6713 Processor
2. Implementation of Discrete Time Convolution using TMS320c6713 Processor
3. Implementation of DFT and FFT using TMS320c6713 Processor
4. Design of IIR Filter for Low pass, High pass, Band pass and Band Stop Filtering using
TMS320c6713 Processor.
5. Design of FIR Filter for Low pass, High pass, Band pass and Band Stop Filtering using
TMS320c6713 Processor.
6. Implementation of Interpolator and Decimator for Sampling Rate Conversion using
TMS320c6713 Processor
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyze spectrum of DT signals using transform domain mathematical tools such as
DFT, FFT
2. Design and Realize IIR filters for Low pass and High pass Filtering Application
3. Design and Realize FIR filters for Low pass and High pass Filtering Application
4. Analyze Multirate Structures for Sampling Rate Conversion (Interpolation,
Decimation, Fractional Rate Conversion)
5. Implement FIR and IIR Filters in DSP Processor and Apply the same for filtering of
Signals in Real Time

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Mandatory Course
B. Tech III Year I Semester
20HUM902 / 20HUM102* UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES
L T P C
2/3* 0 0 0/3*
Pre-requisite None.

Course Description:
This course discusses students’ role in their family and briefly touches issues related to their role in
the society and the nature.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand Happiness and Prosperity correctly and basic Human Aspirations
2. Able to self-verify the Harmony in the Human Being
3. Visualize a universal harmonious order in society which leads to Undivided Society at
Universal Order- from family to world family.
4. Understanding Harmony in the Nature and Existence - Whole existence as Coexistence
5. Implicate the UHV in professional ethics.

UNIT I The Process for Value Education - Basic Human Aspirations 8 hours

L1: Purpose and motivation for the course, recapitulation from Universal Human Values-I
L2: Self-Exploration–what is it? - Its content and process;
‘Natural Acceptance’ and Experiential Validation- as the process for self-exploration
L3: Continuous Happiness and Prosperity- A look at basic Human Aspirations
L4: Right understanding, Relationship and Physical Facility- the basic requirements for fulfilment of
aspirations of every human being with their correct priority
L5: Understanding Happiness and Prosperity correctly- A critical appraisal of the current scenario
L6: Method to fulfil the above human aspirations: understanding and living in harmony at various levels.
T1 & T2: Discussion on natural acceptance in human being as the innate acceptance for living with
responsibility (living in relationship, harmony and co-existence) rather than as arbitrariness in choice based
on liking-disliking.

UNIT II Understanding Harmony in the Human Being - Harmony in 8 hours


Myself!
L7: Understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‘I’ and the material ‘Body’
L8: Understanding the needs of Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’ - happiness and physical facility
L9: Understanding the Body as an instrument of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer)
L10: Understanding the characteristics and activities of ‘I’ and harmony in ‘I’
L11: Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Self-regulation and Health; correct appraisal of
Physical needs, meaning of Prosperity in detail.
L12: Programs to ensure Self-regulation and Health.
T3 & T4: Discussion on the role others have played in making material goods available to me. Identifying
from one’s own life. Differentiate between prosperity and accumulation. Discuss program for ensuring health
vs dealing with disease

UNIT III Understanding Harmony in the Family and Society 7 hours


L13: Understanding values in human-human relationship; meaning of Justice (nine universal values
in relationships) and program for its fulfilment to ensure mutual happiness; Trust and Respect as the
foundational values of relationship
L14: Understanding the meaning of Trust; Difference between intention and competence
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

L15: Understanding the meaning of Respect, Difference between respect and differentiation; the other
salient values in relationship
L16: Understanding the harmony in the society (society being an extension of family): Resolution,
Prosperity, fearlessness (trust) and co-existence as comprehensive Human Goals
L17: Visualizing a universal harmonious order in society- Undivided Society, Universal Order- from
family to world family.
T5 & T6: Reflection on relationships in family, hostel and institute as extended family, real life examples,
teacher-student relationship, goal of education etc. Gratitude as a universal value in relationships. Discuss
with scenarios. Elicit examples from students’ lives

UNIT IV Understanding Harmony in the Nature and Existence 6 hours


L18: Understanding the harmony in the Nature
L19: Interconnectedness and mutual fulfilment among the four orders of nature- recyclability and
self- regulation in nature
L20: Understanding Existence as Co-existence of mutually interacting units in all-pervasive space
L21: Holistic perception of harmony at all levels of existence.
T7 & T8: Discussion on human being as cause of imbalance in nature (film “Home” can be used),
pollution, depletion of resources and role of technology etc.

UNIT V Implications of Holistic Understanding of Harmony on 11 hours


Professional Ethics
L22: Natural acceptance of human values
L23: Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct
L24: Basis for Humanistic Education, Humanistic Constitution and Humanistic Universal Order
L25; Competence in professional ethics: a. Ability to utilize the professional competence for
augmenting universal human order b. Ability to identify the scope and characteristics of people-
friendly and eco-friendly production systems, c. Ability to identify and develop appropriate
technologies and management patterns for above production systems.
L26: Case studies of typical holistic technologies, management models and production systems
L27: Strategy for transition from the present state to Universal Human Order: a. At the level of
individual: as socially and ecologically responsible engineers, technologists and managers b. At the
level of society: as mutually enriching institutions and organizations
L28: Sum up.
T9-T14: Exercises and Case Studies For e.g. Individual discussion on the conduct as an engineer or
scientist etc.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understood the natural acceptance in human being as the innate acceptance,
2. More aware of themselves,
3. Maintain harmony with family and society by recognizing Harmony in Human-Human
Relationship,
4. Try to get Harmony in the Nature and Existence by realizing existence as Coexistence
5. More responsible in life, and in handling problems with sustainable solutions, while keeping
human relationships and human nature in mind with better critical ability.

Text Book(s)
1. Human Values and Professional Ethics by R R Gaur, R Sangal, G P Bagaria, Excel Books, New
Delhi, 2010
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Reference Books
1. Jeevan Vidya: Ek Parichaya, A Nagaraj, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, Amarkantak, 1999.
2. Human Values, A.N. Tripathi, New Age Intl. Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
3. The Story of Stuff (Book).
4. The Story of My Experiments with Truth - by Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi

Mode of Evaluation: Assignment / Quiz, Classroom participation, Mini project / Report, Internal
Mid Examination and external semester end examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

III Year II Semester


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE111 VLSI DESIGN
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE102

Course Description:
This course describes about various VLSI design methodologies, fundamentals of CMOS technology.
It incorporates basics of MOSFET models, CMOS design rules, Design of VLSI Systems,
combinational logic design, sequential logic design, logic families and VLSI Design flow.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study the fundamentals of CMOS circuits and its characteristics
2. Learn the design and realization of combinational digital circuits.
3. Learn the design and realization of sequential digital circuits.
4. Architectural choices and performance tradeoffs involved in designing and realizing the
circuits in CMOS technology are discussed
5. Learn the different FPGA architectures and testability of VLSI circuits.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9 hours

MOS Transistor, CMOS logic, Inverter, Pass Transistor, Transmission gate, Layout Design Rules,
Gate Layouts, Stick Diagrams, Long-Channel I-V Charters tics, C-V Charters tics, Non ideal I-V
Effects, DC Transfer characteristics, RC Delay Model, Elmore Delay, Linear Delay Model, Logical
effort, Parasitic Delay, Delay in Logic Gate, Scaling.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9 hours


Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascode Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic
Circuits, Pass Transistor Logic, Transmission Gates, Domino, Dual Rail Domino, CPL, DCVSPG,
DPL, Circuit Pitfalls.
Power: Dynamic Power, Static Power, Low Power Architecture.

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9 hours


Static latches and Registers, Dynamic latches and Registers, Pulse Registers, Sense Amplifier
Based Register, Pipelining, Schmitt Trigger, Monostable Sequential Circuits, Astable Sequential
Circuits.
Timing Issues: Timing Classification Of Digital System, Synchronous Design.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS AND 9 hours


SUBSYSTEM
Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders, Multipliers, Shifters, ALUs, power and speed
tradeoffs, Case Study: Design as a tradeoff.
Designing Memory and Array structures: Memory Architectures and Building Blocks, Memory
Core, Memory Peripheral Circuitry.

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES AND TESTING 9 hours


FPGA Building Block Architectures, FPGA Interconnect Routing Procedures. Design for Testability:
Ad Hoc Testing, Scan Design, BIST, IDDQ Testing, Design for Manufacturability, Boundary Scan.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Realize the concepts of digital building blocks using MOS transistor.
2. Design combinational MOS circuits and power strategies
3. Design and construct Sequential Circuits and Timing systems.
4. Design arithmetic building blocks and memory subsystems.
5. Apply and implement FPGA design flow and testing.
Text Book(s)
1. Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th Edition, Pearson , 2017.
2. Jan M. Rabaey ,Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, ”Digital Integrated Circuits:A
Design perspective”, Second Edition , Pearson , 2016.
Reference Books
1. M.J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addisson Wesley, 1997

2. Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits:Analysis
& Design”,4th edition McGraw Hill Education,2013
3. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: System On Chip”, Pearson Education, 2007

4. R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India 2005.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE112 ANTENNA AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE108
Course Description:
The course will introduce the students about the antenna radiation mechanism along with the different
important parameters of the antenna. The course will give an overview of different types of antennas and
there working principle. Further, in this course different RF and Microwave spectrums will be discussed
along with its applications. Students will learn about microwave networks, power dividers, couplers, etc.
and microwave measurement with test bench.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study about brief history of antenna and different types of antenna
2. Know the fundamental parameters of antenna design
3. Analysis of different types of antennas
4. Study about different Microwave Spectrum and application of microwave signals
5. Design and analysis of microwave networks and know the various measurement of
microwave

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANTENNA THEORY 9 hours

Introduction to Antenna- Introduction, Historical Advancement, Types of Antennas, Radiation


Mechanism- Radiation pattern, Radiation pattern Lobes, Isotropic, Directional, and Omnidirectional
Patterns, Radiation Power Density, Radiation Intensity, Beam-width, Directivity, Gain of Antenna,
Beam Efficiency, Bandwidth, Polarization, Input impedance, Antenna Radiation Efficiency, Friis
transmission equation, radar range equation

UNIT II ANTENNA ARRAYS 9 hours


Point Sources – Definition, Patterns, arrays of 2 Isotropic Sources - Different Cases, Principle of
Pattern Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays – Broadside Arrays, Endfire Arrays, EFA with
Increased Directivity, Derivation of their Characteristics and Comparison, BSAs with Non-uniform
Amplitude Distributions – General Considerations and Binomial Arrays.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE ENGINEERING 9 hours


Introduction to RF& Microwave Spectrum, History of Microwaves, Applications of Microwaves:
Civil and Military, Medical, Safety considerations, Modern Trends in Microwaves Engineering, Radio
Aids to Navigation, RFID, GPS, Effect of Microwave on human Body.

UNIT IV MICROWAVE DEVICE DESIGN 9 hours


Three port and Four Port networks, T junction and resistive power divider, Wilkinson power divider,
Rat race Coupler (180o hybrid coupler) Microwave Filters: Filter design by insertion loss method, Low
pass filter implementation (Butterworth and Chebyshev)-Richards transformation, Kuroda’s identity -
Stepped impedance.

UNIT V MICROWAVE NETWORK ANALYSIS AND MICROWAVE 9 hours


MEASUREMENTS
Microwave network Analysis - Scattering matrix - reciprocal networks and lossless networks,
generalized S-parameters, signal flow graph–decomposition of signal flow graphs. Wilkinson power
Divider
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Microwave Tubes: TWT, Klystron amplifier, Reflex Klystron, Magnetron.


Semiconductor Devices: Gunn diode, Tunnel diode, IMPATT PIN Diode.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Distinguish different types of antennas used in real world
2. Understand the concepts of antenna parameters and apply them for antenna analysis
3. Design and analysis of different types of antennas
4. Understand RF spectrum, its application and history of microwaves.
5. Design and analysis of Microwave devices along with Understand the methods used to measure
different parameters of Microwave Engineering

Text Book(s)
1. C.A. Balanis, Antenna Theory - Analysis and Design, John Wiley,4th edition, February 2016

2. Microwave Engineering, M. Pozar, Willey & Sons Inc. 4th Edition, 2011

Reference Books
1. Microwave Devices and Circuits, Samuel Y. Lio , Pearson, 3rd edition, 2003

2. J.D. Kraus, Antennas, McGraw Hill,3rd edition 2001.

3. Microwave Engineering, A Das & S Das. Mc Graw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2017

4. R.K. Shevgaonkar, Electromagnetic Waves, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

5. R.E. Collin, Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill, 1985

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE113 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE109

Course Description:
Digital communication is a fundamental course in the electronics and communication stream. The
objectives of this course is to introduce the fundamental principles and mathematical model to analyse
and successful design of a digital communication system. Topics include conversion of analog
waveforms into coded pulses, baseband modulation and optimal detections, design of digital bandpass
modulation techniques such as Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK),
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM), M-ary Phase Shift Keying (M-PSK) etc. The course also
includes performance evaluation of various digital bandpass modulation techniques in terms of bit-
error-rate and capacity. Other fundamental concepts such as the effects of inter-symbol-interference
(ISI), equalization technique and carrier recovery are studied.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to

1. Gain the knowledge of fundamental operations e.g. sampling, quantization, and coding to
convert analog waveforms into coded pulses.
2. Characterize the baseband signal modulation in time and frequency domains and to design
the optimum receiver for it.
3. Develop understanding of digital passband transmission techniques (i.e., BPSK, BASK,
BFSK, QAM, QPSK) and their transmission and reception.
4. Determine the performance of various digital bandpass modulation techniques in terms of
bit-error-rate and capacity.
5. Analyze the effects of inter-symbol-interference of digital modulation techniques in band
limited channel and design the equalizer to mitigates the effects of ISI.

UNIT I CONVERSION OF ANALOG WAVEFORMS INTO CODED 9 hours


PULSES
Review of Sampling theory, Nyquist criterion, Aliasing effect, Quantization: Uniform and non-
uniform quantization, Pulse code modulation (PCM), Quantization noise and signal to quantization
noise ratio, Differential PCM (DPCM), Delta modulation, Adaptive delta modulation, Noise in delta
modulation: Granular and slope overload distortions. Time division multiplexing (TDM), Digital
telephony: T1 carrier system.

UNIT II DIGITAL BASEBAND TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTIONS 9 hours


Concepts of line coding & its properties. NRZ & RZ types, signalling format for unipolar, polar,
bipolar (AMI) & Manchester coding and their power spectra. Optimum receiver for baseband in
additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN): Matched filter, derivation of its impulse response and peak
signal to noise ratio, matched filter as correlator receiver.

UNIT III DIGITAL BANDPASS TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION 9 hours


Types of digital modulation, waveforms and mathematical expressions for amplitude, frequency and
phase shift keying, Concepts of constellation diagram, method of generation and detection of binary
ASK, FSK & PSK, differential phase shift keying, M-ary PSK (M-PSK), M-ary quadrature amplitude
modulation (M-QAM).
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT IV PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL BANDPASS 9 hours


SYSTEMS
Probability of error for BPSK, BASK and BFSK. Performance comparison of various digital
modulation techniques. Shannon- Hartley capacity theorem, BW efficiency of different modulation
schemes, Modulation & coding trade-offs, bandwidth- SNR trade-off.

UNIT V EQUALIZATION AND CARRIER RECOVERY 9 hours


TECHNIQUES
Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) – Nyquist criterion for distortion less transmission – Raised cosine
spectrum – Correlative coding – Eye pattern, Equalization- zero forcing and basics of adaptive linear
equalizers, Synchronization and Carrier Recovery for Digital modulation.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Acquire the knowledge of fundamental operations sampling, quantization, and encoding for
conversion of analog waveforms into coded pulses.
2. Design of optimal receiver filter for digital baseband modulation.
3. Analyse the time and frequency domain representations of digital bandpass modulation
4. Determine the bit error rate performance of various digital bandpass modulations.
5. Understand the effects of inter-symbol interference due to bandlimited channel and mitigates the
effects by equalization techniques to improve the performance.
Text Book(s)
1. S. Haykin, Digital Communication Systems, 1st edition, Wiley , 2013

2. B. P. Lathi and Z. Ding, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 4th edition,
Oxford , 2011
Reference Books
1. B. Sklar and P. K. Ray, Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd edition,
Pearson , 2009.
2. J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, Digital Communications, 5th edition, McGraw Hill , 2014

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE209 VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE102

Course Description:
This course provides hands on experience to students on design and implementation various digital
circuits using hardware design language Verilog HDL.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Learn Hardware Descriptive Language (Verilog/VHDL)
2. Learn the fundamental principles of VLSI circuit design in digital domain.
3. Learn the fundamental principles of VLSI circuit design in analog domain.
4. Familiarize fusing of logical modules on FPGAs.
5. Provide hands on design experience with professional design (EDA) platforms

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Part I: Digital System Design using HDL & FPGA
1. Design an Adder (Min 8 Bit) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
2. Design a Multiplier (4 Bit Min) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
3. Design an ALU using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and implement by
Xilinx/Altera FPGA
4. Design a Universal Shift Register using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software
and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
5. Design Finite State Machine (Moore/Mealy) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera
Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
6. Design Memories using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and implement by
Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Compare pre synthesis and post synthesis simulation for experiments 1 to 6
Requirements: Xilinx ISE/Altera Quartus/ equivalent EDA Tools along with Xilinx/Altera/equivalent
FPGA Boards
Part-II: Digital Circuit Design
7. Design and simulate a CMOS inverter using digital flow
8. Design and simulate a CMOS Basic Gates & Flip-Flops
9. Design and simulate a 4-bit synchronous counter using a Flip-Flops
Manual/Automatic Layout Generation and Post Layout Extraction for experiments 7 to 9
Analyze the power, area and timing for experiments 7 to 9 by performing Pre-Layout
and Post Layout Simulations.
Part-III Analog Circuit Design
10. Design and Simulate a CMOS Inverting Amplifier.
11. Design and Simulate basic Common Source, Common Gate and Common Drain Amplifiers.
Analyze the input impedance, output impedance, gain and bandwidth for experiments 10 and
11 by performing Schematic Simulations.
Design and simulate simple 5 transistor differential amplifier. Analyze Gain,
12. Bandwidth and CMRR by performing Schematic Simulations.
Requirements: Cadence/Synopsis/ Mentor Graphics/Tanner/equivalent EDA Tools
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Write HDL code for basic as well as advanced digital integrated circuit.
2. Import the logic modules into FPGA Boards.
3. Synthesize Place and Route the digital IPs.
4. Design, Simulate and Extract the layouts of Digital IC Blocks using EDA tools
5. Design, Simulate and Extract the layouts of Analog IC Blocks using EDA tools

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE210 MICROWAVE ENGINEERING LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE108, 20ECE112
Course Description:
This laboratory course is designed to provide basic understanding on measurements techniques
used at microwave frequencies. The knowledge obtained from this course is useful to have
firsthand knowledge and hands on experience in standing wave phenomenon on transmission
lines.Course covers: Reflex Klystron Characteristics, Gunn Diode Characteristics, Attenuation
measurement, Directional Coupler Characteristics, VSWR Measurement, Impedance
Measurement, waveguide parameters measurement, measurement of scattering parameters of
Directional Coupler, and Magic Tee

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. This course designed to understand frequency spectrum of RF wave design two cavity
klystron with output power and efficiency calculation.
2. To Measure attenuation VSWR impedance waveguide parameters of microwaves devices
3. To develop the knowledge on transmission lines for microwaves, resonators and wave guide
components and applications.
4. To analyze the SWR measurement.
5. To explain the ideas about measurement of reflex klystron and Gunn diode characteristics.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Hardware Experiments
1. Characteristics of Klystron tube and to determine its electronic tuning range.
2. Gunn Diode characteristics
1. 2.1 Output power and frequency as a function of voltage.
2.2 Square wave modulation through diode
3. Attenuation Measurement.
4. Directional Coupler Characteristics
5. Waveguide parameters measurement.
6. VSWR Measurement.
7. Impedance Measurement
8. Scattering parameters Magic Tee
Simulation Experiments
9. Dipole Antenna Design and Simulation using CEM-ONE
10. Yagi-Uda Antenna simulation using CEM-ONE
11. Magic Tee Simulation using CEM-ONE
12. Antenna Design and Analysis using MALAB

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyze the microwave bench working.
2. Analyze the SWR measurement technique.
3. Analyze the measurement of reflex klystron and Gunn diode characteristics.
4. Understand well about measurement of scattering parameters.
5. Learn to use simulation software’s.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE211 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Pre-requisite 20ECE105

Course Description:
This laboratory course is designed to help the students to analyse various digital modulation and
demodulation techniques and Time Division Multiplexing. Students also analyse PCM, delta
modulation, companding and various channel encoding and decoding used in digital communication
systems.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand how the analog signals are converted into binary data using pulse code
modulation and delta modulation
2. Understand how Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing is used in
communication to send signals from many users on a single channel/medium and
distributed to the intended user at the destination
3. Understand how the binary data is modulated in the transmitter and demodulated in the
receiver using different modulation and demodulation techniques
4. Understand how A-Law & μ-Law are applied for companding signals in PCM
5. Understand the need for channel coding and how the data is encoded in the transmitter
and decoded in the receiver.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation


2. Differential Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation
3. Delta Modulation and Demodulation
4. Time Division Multiplexing & De multiplexing
5. ASK, FSK, PSK Modulation and Demodulation
Differential PSK (DPSK) Modulation and Demodulation
6.
7. Quadrature PSK (QPSK) Modulation and Demodulation
8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) and Demodulation
Digital Companding (A-Law & μ-Law)
9.
Linear Block Code- Encoder and Decoder
10.
Convolutional Code- Encoder and Decoder
11.
Performance comparison of Line Coding techniques using MATLAB
12.
BER Performance analysis of digital modulation schemes using MATLAB
13.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyse pulse code modulation and delta modulation used in communication
2. Apply Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing for signals in communication
3. Analyse various pass band modulation and demodulation techniques
4. Apply A-Law & μ-Law companding of signals
5. Understand various channel decoding and encoding for communication
6.
Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Mandatory Course
B. Tech III Year II Semester
20CE901 DISASTER MANAGEMENT
L T P C
2 0 0 0
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
The goal of this course is to expose the under graduate students regarding different types of disasters and
preparedness needed to mitigate their effects. The course matrix will cover various natural, biological, chemical
and emerging hazards and risks that may cause property, loss of lives, and livestock’s. Thus, the future engineers
will understand the social responsibility for the preparedness and mitigation of the damages caused by the
disasters.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Make aware the students about disasters and their impact on living beings
2. Ensure the students for the understanding on vulnerability, disasters, disaster prevention and
risk reduction.
3. To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches for the Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
4. To enhance awareness of institutional processes available in the country for the disaster risk
mitigation.
5. To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential disaster response in
areas where they live, with due sensitivity

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6 hours

Introduction, Etymology of disaster, Concepts and definitions: disaster, hazard, vulnerability, risks, Resilience,
prevention and mitigation.

UNIT II TYPES OF DISASTERS 6 hours


Types of Disaster; natural disasters (earthquakes, volcanoes, forest fires and explosions, heat and cold waves,
floods, draught, cyclones, tsunami, landslides, soil erosion); manmade disasters (industrial pollution, artificial
flooding in urban areas, nuclear radiation, chemical spills, transportation accidents, terrorist strikes, etc.), hazard
and vulnerability profile of India, mountain and coastal areas, ecological fragility.

UNIT III DISASTER IMPACTS 6 hours


Disaster Impacts (environmental, physical, social, ecological, economic, political, etc.); health, psychosocial
issues; demographic aspects (gender, age, special needs); hazard locations; global and national disaster trends;
climate change and urban disasters.

UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MITIGATION MEASURES 6 hours


Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR) - Disaster management- four phase approach; prevention, mitigation,
preparedness, relief and recovery; structural and non-structural measures; risk analysis, vulnerability and
capacity assessment; early warning systems, Post disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food
safety, waste management, disease control, security, communications), DRR programmers in India and the
activities of National Disaster Management Authority. Roles and responsibilities of government, community,
local institutions, NGOs and other stakeholders; Policies and legislation for disaster risk reduction.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V IMPACT OF DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES 6 hours


Disasters, Environment and Development - Factors affecting vulnerability such as impact of developmental
projects and environmental modifications (including of dams, landuse changes, urbanization etc.), sustainable
and environmental friendly recovery; reconstruction and development methods.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understanding on the nature of disasters
2. Application of Disaster Concepts to Management
3. Analyzing Relationship between Development and Disasters.
4. Ability to understand Categories of Disasters.
5. Realization of the responsibilities to society
Text Book(s)
1. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation

Reference Books
1. http://ndma.gov.in/ (Home page of National Disaster Management Authority)
2. http://www.ndmindia.nic.in/%20(National%20Disaster%20management%20in%20India,%20Ministry%20
of%20Home%20Affairs).
3. Pradeep Sahni, 2004, Disaster Risk Reduction in South Asia, Prentice Hall
4. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: Techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.

5. Disaster Medical Systems Guidelines. Emergency Medical Services Authority, State of California, EMSA
no.214, June 2003
6. Inter Agency Standing Committee (IASC) (Feb. 2007). IASC Guidelines on Mental Health and Psychosocial
Support in Emergency Settings. Geneva: IASC

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments and Mid Term Tests


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective - II
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective - II
20MAT301 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20MAT101, 20MAT107, 20MAT110

Course Description:
This course reviews and continues the study of computational techniques for evaluating interpolations,
derivatives and integrals; solving system of algebraic equations, transcendental equations, ordinary
differential equations and partial differential equations. The course emphasizes on numerical and
mathematical methods of solutions with appropriate error analysis. The students use MATLAB as the
computer language to obtain solutions to a few assigned problems.

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce computation methods of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
2. To avail the basics of numerical techniques for solving the system of linear equations
3. To familiarize the knowledge of interpolation and numerical calculus.
4. To use numerical calculus for solving ordinary differential equations.
5. To introduce the computational techniques for solving partial differential equations.

UNIT I SOLUTIONS OF ALGEBRAIC AND TRANSCENDENTAL 9 hours


EQUATIONS
Introduction to MATLAB, errors, sources of errors, floating point arithmetic, significant digits, relative
error, propagation of errors, how to avoid loss of significant digits, evaluation of polynomial - Bisection
method, False-position method, Secant method, Fixed-point iteration method, Newton’s method – single
and multiple roots, Order of convergence of the methods.
Exercises of Bisection method and Newton’s method through MATLAB

UNIT II SOLUTIONS OF SYSTEM OF ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS 9 hours


Gaussian Elimination, LU decomposition, Thomas algorithm for the tridiagonal systems, Norms-
Euclidean, mini-maxi, Frobenius and 1-,2- and ∞-norms, Condition numbers and errors in computed
solutions. Jacobi’s method, Gauss-Seidel method, Power method for obtaining eigenvalues and
eigenvectors of matrices.Exercises of Gaussian Elimination and Gauss-Seidel method through MATLAB

UNIT III INTERPOLATION & NUMERICAL CALCULUS 9 hours


Existence and Uniqueness of interpolating polynomial, Lagrange polynomials, Divided differences,
Evenly spaced points, Error of interpolation, cubic spline, Inverse interpolation, Derivatives from
difference table, Higher order derivatives, Trapezoidal rule, Simpsons rule, a composite formula,
Gaussian Quadrature - Exercises of Divided differences and Simpson’s rule through MATLAB

UNIT IV NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS TO ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL 9 hours


EQUATIONS
Taylor series method, Euler and Modified Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta methods for initial value
problems, Shooting method, Finite difference method for boundary value problems.
Exercises of Runge-Kutta method and Shooting method through MATLAB.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL 9 hours


EQUATIONS
Finite difference methods for one-dimensional Wave and Heat equations; Laplace and Poisson equations
(five-point formula) - Exercises of Finite difference method (forward, central and backward
differentiation) and Crank-Nicolson method through MATLAB

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Solve the system of algebraic and transcendental equations.
2. Apply the numerical techniques to find the solution to system of equations.
3. Calculate and analyze the rate of variations and numerical sum of such changes using numerical
calculus relevant to the field of Engineering.
4. Find the accurate numerical solutions to ordinary differential equations representing some
Engineering problems.
5. Compute the solutions for engineering problems represented by partial differential equations.

Text Books:
1. Curtis F. Gerald, Patrich O. Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, 7th
Edition, 2003.
2. S.S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.

Reference Books:

1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd edition (2014), Khanna publishers.

2. Burden and Faires, Numerical Analysis 7th ed., Thomson Learning, 2001.

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by E. Kreyszig, 10th ed., Wiley, 2010.


4. Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists by Steven C. Chapra, 3 rd
ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
5. M.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain, Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering, New
Age International Ltd., 5th Edition, 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective - II
20MAT302 ENGINEERING OPTIMIZATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20MAT101, 20MAT106, 20MAT104, 20MAT108, 20MAT109, 20MAT110.

Course Description:
Unconstrained and constrained optimization, Linear programming problem, transportation and
assignment problems, dynamic programming problem, project management and queuing models.

Course Objectives:
1. Understand the optimization techniques for solving engineering problems.
2. Formulate and solve linear programming problem.
3. Obtain the optimal solution for transportation and assignment problems.
4. Avail knowledge to solve dynamic programming problem using recursive relations.
5. Analyze the techniques of project management and queuing models.

UNIT I CLASSICAL OPTIMIZATION 9 hours

Introduction to optimization, unconstrained optimization with single variable and multi variable.
Constrained multivariable optimization with equality constraints- Lagrange multipliers method,
constrained multivariable optimization with inequality constraints - Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

UNIT II LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM 9 hours


Linear Programming Problem (LPP), Mathematical formulation, graphical solution, simplex method.
Artificial variable technique - Big M-method and two phase simplex method. Duality, dual Simplex
method.

UNIT III TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM AND ASSIGNMENT 9 hours


PROBLEM
Transportation problem: definition and algorithm, transshipment problem. Assignment problem,
travelling salesman problem.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING 9 hours


Introduction, developing optimal decision policy, Dynamic Programming Problem (DPP) under
certainty, DPP approach for solving LPP.

UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND QUEUING MODELS 9 hours


Network analysis: Network representation, Critical Path Method (CPM) and Project Evolutionary and
Review Technique (PERT). Introduction to queuing system, single server queuing models (M/M/1)
:(∞/FCFS), (M/M/1): (N/FCFS).

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Understood the importance of unconstrained and constrained optimization to solve engineering
problems.
2. Get an idea about the linear programming techniques.
3. Solve transportation and assignment problems in engineering situations.
4. Apply the Bellman principle of optimality to solve dynamic programming problem.
5. Analyze the problems of network analysis for project management and Queuing systems engineering
& industry.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. J K Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Practice, Macmillan Publishers India Ltd, 5 th
edition,2013.
2. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd edition (2014), Khanna publishers.

Reference Books
1. Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Pearson Education, 9/E, 2011.
2. FS Hillier and GJ Lieberman, Introduction to Operations Research, TMH, 8/E, 2006.

3. JC Pant, Introduction to Optimization: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, New, 6/E, 2004.
4. A Ravindran, DT Philips and JJ Solberg, Operations Research: Principles and Practice, John
Wiley& Sons, Singapore, 2ndedition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective - II
20PHY301 OPTICAL PHYSICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
The course will cover Geometrical optics, Aberrations, Physical Optics, Diffraction and Optical fibers.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. Knowledge of basic principles and concepts in optics and the techniques used to deal with them.
2. Explain the limitations associated with spherical and chromatic aberration
3. Describe optical systems such as microscopes and telescopes with reference to parameters such
as angular magnification and depth of field
4. Provide students with a working knowledge of optical physics, including interference,
diffraction and physical optics.
5. Introduce construction and concepts of basic fiber optic communication system and to make the
students learn about its important applications for societal needs.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 hours


Corpuscular and wave theory, Fermat’s principle, Matrices for translation, refraction and reflection,
Unit and nodal planes, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors.

UNIT II ABERRATIONS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 9 hours


Types of aberrations, Chromatic and monochromatic aberrations. Different types of monochromatic
aberrations. Simple and Compound microscopes, Astronomical and Terrestrial telescopes. Ramsden’s
and Huygens’ eye pieces.

UNIT III WAVE OPTICS & INTERFERENCE 9 hours


Huygens’s principle, Superposition of waves, Fourier transforms, representation of slits and apertures,
Two beam interference by Division of wave front. Applications of Interference, Nonlinear interaction
of light with matter (self-study).

UNIT IV DIFFRACTION & POLARISATION 9 hours


Fraunhoffer diffraction, Diffraction from single slit, double slit & multiple slits, Fresnel half-period
zones, Zone plate, Applications of diffraction, Polarization, Malus’ law, double refraction. Applications
of polarization.

UNIT V FIBER OPTICS 9 hours


Construction and working principle of optical fibers, Numerical aperture and acceptance angle, Types
of optical fibers. Attenuation and losses in optical fibers, Analog and Digital optical fiber
communication system. Applications of optical fibers in communications, sensors and medicine.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Recollect the fundamental characteristics of light and their mathematical principles.
2. Learn the principles of superposition, Interference and Diffraction
3. Understand nonlinear optics and photonics phenomena.
4. Be exposed to the application of optical techniques in cutting edge research areas.
5. Describe the basic laser physics, working of lasers and principle of propagation of light in optical
fibers.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:

1. Optics by Ghatak, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill (2011).

Reference Books
1. Optics by Lipson, Lipson & Lipson, 4th Edition, Cambridge Univ Press (2010).
2. Optics by Hecht, 4th Edition, Addison-Wesley (2002).

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20PHY302 LASER PHYSICS AND ADVANCED LASER TECHNOLOGY


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Basic knowledge of atomic structure at intermediate (10+2) level is sufficient

Course Description:
Laser usage is rampant in various technological applications. Several fields gaining attention in the
usage of lasers. This course covers the introduction to the theory and mechanism of laser action, various
types of lasers and their applications and future use.

Course Objectives:
1. Make the student to understand the detailed principles of various lasers.
2. Profound understanding of different variety of lasers will provide them to think of superior selection
and usage of lasers in practical technological applications.
3. Students are aware of latest developments in certain areas of Laser technology which have important
applications for societal needs.
4. Explain how material processing is accomplished with lasers. Estimate laser operation parameters for
material processing.
5. Exposure about Lasers applications in engineering, communications, spectroscopy and material
process etc.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO LASER TECHNOLOGY 9 hours

Laser characteristics, The Einstein Coefficients, Absorption and Emission Cross Sections, Spontaneous
and Stimulated emission of radiation, Population inversion, Methods of Population Inversion, Laser
Rate Equations, stable two minor optical resonators, Mode selection, Gain in the regenerative laser
cavity.

UNIT II GASES AND LIQUIDS LASING MEDIUM 9 hours


Energy levels & Radiative properties of Atoms and molecules; Atomic lasers: He-Ne laser, Argon Ion
laser; Molecular Lasers: Carbon dioxide laser, Liquid energy levels and their radiative properties,
Organic Dye laser.

UNIT III SOLID STATE LASERS 9 hours


Energy Levels in solids-dielectric medium, Solid-state lasing materials, Narrow line width laser
materials, broad band line width laser materials, solid state lasers: Nd:YAG, Nd:YLF; Ti:Sapphire
(introduction only)
Energy Levels in solids-semiconductor medium, direct and indirect band gap semiconductors,
Semiconductor diode laser, Quantum dot lasers (Introduction only);

UNIT IV PULSED OPERATION OF LASERS 9 hours


Nanosecond: Q-Switching, Techniques of Q-Switching: electro-optic, Acousto-Optic.
Femtosecond: Relationship between pulse duration and Spectral Width, Passive mode-locking,
Active mode locking, Kerr lens mode locking, Amplification of femtosecond pulses.

UNIT V LASER APPLICATIONS 9 hours


Laser processing of materials: laser cutting, laser drilling, welding; Lasers in metrology- Accurate
measurement of length, light wave communications; Laser spectroscopy: Laser fluorescence and
Raman scattering.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course the students shall be able to:
1. Understand the principle of phenomenon of laser and identify the operating principle involved in
various type of lasers.
2. Estimate stability requirements in producing laser light by different types of sources
3. Differentiate or list the various types of lasers and their means of excitation.
4. Assess (Identify) which laser would best meet the need for a particular industrial or research task.
5. Student can knowledge of latest technological developments in laser technology. Femtosecond laser
etc.

Text Books:

1. Laser Fundamentals: William T Silfvast. Cambridge Publication.


2. Laser Theory and Applications: A.K. Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Springer
3. Femtosecond Laser Pulses Principles and Experiments: Claude Rulli`ere, Springer
4. Principles of Laser: O. Svelto
5. Laser Physics: Peter W Miloni, Joseph H Eberly.

Reference Books
1. Solid State Laser Engineering: Walter Koechner. Springer series in optical sciences.
2. Ultrafast Optics, Andrew M. Weiner
3. Laser spectroscopy: Demtroder
4. Laser Applications: Monte Ross

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective - II
20CHE301 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM INDUSTRY
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description:
It deals with basic principles of petroleum engineering and the processes involved in petroleum industry.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. To understand the basic concepts of crude oil, distillation process, internals, petroleum products
and their properties, Instruments used for fuel testing.
2. To understand the type of chemicals and their application in petroleum industry.
3. To introduce the basic principles of hydroprocessing and fluid catalytic cracking and familiarize
the processes involved there.
4. To familiarize the basic concepts of catalysis, bioprocesses in the refinery.
5. Health, environment, process safety and management in petroleum companies.

UNIT I BASIC PROCESSES IN PETROLEUM REFINING AND FUEL 9 hours


TESTING
Source of Crude oils and types, Overview of refinery process, Atmospheric Distillation, Vacuum
distillation, Desalter, Desulphurization, Cracking, catalysis, Effluent treatment plant. Density, viscosity,
pour point, flashpoint, octane number, cetane number, Fire point, Chromatography, Ductility, Water
content, Sulphur analysis, MCRT, SARA, HFRR, calorofic value etc.

UNIT II CHEMICALS AND THEIR IMPORTANCE IN PETROLEUM 9 hours


INDUSTRY
Types of products in the refinery and their structural properties, Netralizing amines, Corrosion
inhibitors, Multifunctional additives, viscosity improvers, drag reducing agents, antioxidants, Lubricity
improvers, Antifoam additives, Oil spill absorbers, Dispersants and their applications, Types of
Catalysts used in the refinery, Chemicals for ETP plant.

UNIT III ROLE OF HYDROPROCESSING AND FLUID CATALYTIC 9 hours


CRACKING IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY
Objectives, Hydrocracking Reactions, Hydrocracking feedstocks, Modes of Hydrocracking, Effects of
process variables, Hydro treating process and catalysts Resid hydro processing, FCC Cracking, Catalyst
coking and regeneration, Design concepts, New Designs for Fluidized-Bed Catalytic Cracking Units

UNIT IV ROLE OF CATALYSTS, BIOPROCESSES IN PETROLEUM 9 hours


INDUSTRY
Types of catalyst and their importance, Design of catalyst, selection of catalyst, Catalytic processes.
Introduction to biotechnology, oil recovery from reservoirs, refining of petroleum using
biodesulphurisation, Bioremediation, commercial processes for bioethanol, propanol.

UNIT V HEALTH, ENVIRONMENT, PROCESS SAFETY AND 9 hours


MANAGEMENT IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY
Safety policy, Personal protective equipment, Different type of extinguishers, Types of gloves and their
application, Hydrants and their role, Safety indicators, Safety contact, Environmental pollution,
precaution and first aid, precautions safety, Occupational safety and management, different elements
and their role.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Be able to understand the overview of petroleum industry
2. Be able to understand the concepts of crude oil, types of crude oils, properties of fuels such as octane
number, cetane number, viscosity, density etc. Instruments.
3. Be familiarized with importance and their use of chemicals involved in the petroleum industry.
4. Be familiarized with the processes involved in hydroprocessing and fluid catalytic cracking.
5. Be familiarized the types of catalysts and bioprocesses in the petroleum industry.
6. Understanding the PPE, different types of extinguishers, First aid, process safety and management in
the petroleum industry.

Text Books:
1. Mohamed A. Fahim, Taher A. Al-Sahhaf, Amal Elkilani, Fundamentals of Petroleum Refining,
Elsevier,2009
2. David T Day, Handbook of the Petroleum Industry, Volume 1, ISBN: 137595962X, CHIZINE
PUBN, 2017
3. S. P. Srivastava Jenő Hancsók, Fuels and fuel additives, Wiley VCH Verlag Gmbh & Co,
Weinheim, 2004.
4. Robert O. Anderson, Fundamentals of the Petroleum Industry–University of Oklahoma Pres, 1987.

5. James G.Speight, Handbook of Petroleum Product Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2015

6. Physical Chemistry by G.W. Castellan (Addison Wesley Publishing Company)

Reference Books
1. Sankara Papavinasam, Corrosion Control in the Oil and Gas Industry, Elsevier, 2013
2. Petroleum Engineering Handbook (Vol. 1 through VIII). Editor in Chief: Larry W. Lake, Society of
Petroleum Engineers.
3. Srinivasan Chandrasekaran. Health, safety and Environmental Management for offshore and
Petroleum Engineers, John Wiley and Sons, U.K., ISBN: 978-11-192-2184-5, 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20CHE302 GREEN CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS FOR SUSTAINABLE ENVIRONMENT


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description:
This course aims to introduce the interdisciplinary concept for engineering’s to enhance their knowledge
that they need to contribute with relevance and confidence in developing green technologies. This course
covers feedstocks, green metrics and the design of safer, more efficient processes, as well as the role
catalysts and solvents and green processes for Nanoscience.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. Learn an interdisciplinary approach to the scientific and societal issues arising from industrial
chemical production, including the facets of chemistry and environmental health sciences that can
be integrated to promote green chemistry
2. Sensitize the students in redesigning of chemicals, industrial processes and products by means of
catalysis.
3. Understand the use of alternatives assessments in using environmentally benign solvents.
4. Emphasize current emerging greener technologies and the need of alternative energies.
5. Learn to adopt green chemistry principles in practicing Nanoscience.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9 hours

Introduction, Green chemistry Principles, sustainable development and green chemistry, atom
economy, atom economic: Rearrangement and addition reactions and un-economic reactions:
Substitution, elimination and Wittig reactions, Reducing Toxicity. Waste - problems and Prevention:
Design for degradation.

UNIT II CATALYSIS AND GREEN CHEMISTRY 9 hours


Introduction to catalysis, Heterogeneous catalysts: Basics of Heterogeneous Catalysis, Zeolites:
Catalytic cracking, ZSM-5 catalyst and high silica zeolites, TS1 Oxidation catalyst, Catalytic
Converters, Homogeneous catalysis: Hydrogenation of alkenes using wilkinson’s catalyst, Phase
transfer catalysis: Hazard Reduction, C–C Bond Formation, Oxidation Using Hydrogen Peroxide.

UNIT III ORGANIC SOLVENTS: ENVIRONMENTALLY BENIGN 9 hours


SOLUTIONS
Organic solvents and volatile organic compounds, solvent free systems, supercritical fluids: Super
critical carbondioxide, super critical water and water as a reaction solvent: water based coatings, Ionic
liquids as catalyst and solvent.

UNIT IV EMERGING GREENER TECHNOLOGIES AND ALTERNATIVE 9 hours


ENERGY SOURCES
Biomass as renewable resource, Energy: Fossil Fuels, Energy from Biomass, Solar Power, Fuel
Cells(Hydrogen—oxygen fuel cell), Photochemical Reactions: Advantages of and Challenges Faced
by Photochemical Processes, Examples of Photochemical Reactions(caprolactum), Chemistry Using
Microwaves: Microwave Heating, Microwave-assisted Reactions, Sonochemistry.

UNIT V GREEN PROCESSES FOR GREEN NANOSCIENCE 9 hours


Introduction and traditional methods in the nanomaterials synthesis, Translating green chemistry
principles for practicing Green Nanoscience. Green Synthesis of Nanophase Inorganic Materials and
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Metal Oxide Nanoparticles: Hydrothermal Synthesis, Reflux Synthesis, Microwave-Assisted Synthesis,


Other methods for Green synthesis of metal and metal oxide nanoparticles, Green chemistry applications of
Inorganic nanomaterials

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course the students should:
1. Recognize green chemistry concepts and apply these ideas to develop respect for the
interconnectedness of our world and an ethic of environmental care and sustainability.
2. Understand and apply catalysis for developing eco-friendly processes.
3. Be in a position to use environmental benign solvents where ever possible.
4. Have knowledge of current trends in alternative energy sources.
5. Apply green chemistry principles in practicing green Nanoscience.

Text Books:
1. M. Lancaster, Green Chemistry an introductory text, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2002.

2. Paul T. Anastas and John C. Warner, Green Chemistry Theory and Practice, 4th Edition,
Oxford University Press, USA

Reference Books
1. Edited by Alvise Perosa and Maurizio Selva , Hand Book of Green chemistry Volume 8:
Green Nanoscience, wiley-VCH

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II
20CE301 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
Identification of problematic soils; ground improvement techniques; densification in granular soils;
densification in cohesive soils; soil stabilization; confinement; reinforced earth; geo-synthetics;
improvement of expansive soils.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. To introduce engineering properties of soft, weak and compressible deposits, principles of
treatment for granular and cohesive soils and various stabilization techniques.
2. To bring out concepts of reinforced earth.
3. Applications of geotextiles in various civil engineering projects.

UNIT I DEWATERING & GROUTINHG 9 hours

Introduction- Need for engineered ground improvement, classification of ground modification


techniques; suitability, feasibility and desirability of ground improvement technique.
Methods of de-watering- sumps and interceptor ditches- wells- drains- Electro- osmosis. Objectives of
grouting- grouts and their properties-grouting methods.

UNIT II DENSIFICATION 9 hours


In - situ densification methods in cohesionless Soils: - Vibration at the ground surface, Impact at the
Ground Surface, Vibration at depth, Impact at depth. In - situ densification methods in cohesive soils: -
preloading or dewatering, Vertical drains - Sand Drains- Sand wick geo-drains
- Stone and lime columns - thermal methods.

UNIT III STABILIZATION 9 hours


Methods of stabilization-mechanical-cement- lime-bituminous-chemical stabilization with calcium
chloride- sodium silicate and gypsum.

UNIT IV REINFORCED EARTH & GEOSYNTHETICS 9 hours


Principles - Components of reinforced earth - factors governing design of reinforced earth walls design
principles of reinforced earth walls. Geotextiles- Types, Functions and applications - geo- grids and
geo-membranes - functions and applications.

UNIT V EXPANSIVE SOILS 9 hours


Problems of expansive soils - tests for identification - methods of determination of swell pressure.
Improvement of expansive soils - Foundation techniques in expansive soils - under reamedpiles.

Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, student will be able to
1. Evaluate basic deficiencies of various soil deposits and able to decide various dewatering methods
to improve the soil.
2. Implement different techniques of soil densification.
3. Choose the best method for stabilizing the soil for a given soil condition.
4. Choose-the best geosynthetic materials in different engineering applications.
5. Assessing various types of foundation techniques and methods to control swelling of soil
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. Dr. Purushotham Raj, P., Ground Improvement Techniques, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi.

2. Dr. Sivakumar Babu, GL, An Introduction to Soil Reinforcement & Geosynthetics,


Universities Press

Reference Books
1. Hausmann M.R., Engineering Principles of Ground Modification, McGraw-
Hill International Edition, 1990.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20CE302 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
The course will focus on Basic concept of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), EIA Methodologies,
Impact of Developmental Activities and Land use in soil, water, and vegetation, Environmental Audit,
Post Audit activities, The Environmental pollution Acts.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. To impart knowledge on Environmental management and Environmental Impact Assessment.
2. To give the student the brief knowledge about various legislations and audit protocols.
3. To give student knowledge about the framing of environmental audit through case studies.

UNIT I CONCEPTS AND METHODOLOGIES IN EIA 9 hours

Introduction - Elements of EIA - Factor affecting EIA -Impact evaluation and analysis - Preparation of
Environmental Base map - Classification of environmental parameters. Criteria for the selection of EIA
Methodology - EIA methods: Ad-hoc methods - matrix methods - Network method - Environmental
Media Quality Index Method -overlay methods - cost/benefit Analysis.

UNIT II IMPACT OF DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES 9 hours


Introduction and Methodology for the assessment of soil and ground water - Delineation of study area
- Identification of actives. Procurement of relevant soil quality - Impact prediction - Assessment of
Impact significance -Identification and Incorporation of mitigation measures. EIA in surface water - Air
and Biological environment.

UNIT III IMPACT ON VEGETATION AND WILD LIFE 9 hours


Assessment of Impact of development Activities on Vegetation and wildlife - environmental Impact of
Deforestation - Causes and effects of deforestation.

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL AUDIT 9 hours


Environmental Audit & Environmental legislation objectives of Environmental Audit - Types of
environmental Audit - Audit protocol - stages of Environmental Audit - onsite activities - evaluation of
audit data and preparation of audit report - Post Audit activities.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION ACTS 9 hours


The water Act-1974 - The Air Act-1981 (Prevention & Control of pollution Act.) - Wild life Act- 1972
- Indian Forest Conservation Act-1980 -National Green Tribunal Act –2010 - Biological Diversity Act-
2002.

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Apply the various methods used in predicting environmental impacts.
2. Apply site information to interpret impacts on land and groundwater.
3. Evaluate environmental impacts of various development activities on existing ecosystem.
4. Apply the procedures and various protocols involved in preparation of environmental audit report.
5. Apply the implications of environmental prevention and protection acts in relation to environmental
impact assessment.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. Anjaneyulu, Y., Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies, B.S. Publication, Sultan
Bazar, Kakinada.

Reference Books
1. Glynn, J. and Gary W. Hein Ke., Environmental Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall Publishers
2. Suresh K. Dhaneja Environmental Science and Engineering, S.K., Katania& Sons Publication, New Delhi.
3. Dr. Bhatia, H.S., Environmental Pollution and Control, Galgotia Publication (P) Ltd, Delhi.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20CE303 WATERSHED MANAGEMENT


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
Topic covers basic concepts of watershed, sustainable watershed management approached and practices,
integrated watershed management and modelling, social aspect in watershed management, quantification
of water quality and quantity at the catchment outlet using modern techniques, drought, flood and storm
management at catchment scale.

Course Objectives:
1. To discuss various aspects of water resources development and management on watershed basis.
2. To proliferate the sustainable use and development of natural resources.
3. To enrich the students for change in the hydrological fluxes due altered physiographic condition
(land use or elevation) on a watershed scale.
4. To improve the quantitative problem solving skills of the students for natural resources management.

UNIT I CONCEPT OF WATERSHED 9 hours

Concept of watershed - classification of watershed - introduction to watershed management - objective


of watershed development - Hydrological cycle - water balance equation - different stakeholders and
their relative importance - watershed management policies and decision making. Factor Affecting
Watershed Development: Morphological characteristics: linear - Arial and Relief aspect - land use -
vegetation - soil and geological characteristics - Hydrology and geology and socio-economic
characteristics.

UNIT II WATERSHED MODELING 9 hours


Watershed delineation - modelling of rainfall - runoff process - Concept of integrated watershed
management conjunctive use of water resources - Integrated water resources management. PRA -
Private sector participation - Institutional issues - Socio- economy issues - Integrated development -
Water legislation and implementations - Tools and emerging technologies for watershed management
and planning.

UNIT III EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 9 hours


Types of erosion - factor affecting erosion - effect of erosion on land fertility and capacity - estimation
of soil loss due to erosion: universal soil loss equation - Prevention And Control To Erosion: contour
techniques - ploughing - furrowing- trenching - bunding - terracing - gully control - rockfill dams -
check dams - brushwood dam - Gabion structure.

UNIT IV WATER HARVESTING 9 hours


Rain water harvesting - catchment harvesting - harvesting structures - soil moisture conservation -
check dams - artificial recharge from pond - percolation tanks - Flood And Drought Management:
Definition of flood - Flood frequency analysis: Weibul - Gumbel - and log Pearson methods - Definition
and classification of drought - drought analysis techniques - drought mitigation planning - Management
Of Water Quality: Water quality and pollution - types and Sources of pollution - water quality
modelling- environmental guidelines for water quality.

UNIT V COVER MANAGEMENT 9 hours


Land use land cover change estimation through satellite imageries - land capability classification -
management of forest - agricultural - grassland and wild land - Reclamation of saline and alkaline soil.
Classification of columns based on slenderness ratio - reinforcement & loading - Design of rectangular
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

and circular columns subjected to axial load - (axial load + uni-axial bending) and (axial load + bi-axial
bending). Different Types of Footings - Design of isolated - square - rectangular and circular footings.
Integrated Cropping System For Watersheds: Intercropping - mix cropping strip and terrace cropping
- sustainable agriculture - cover cropping (biomass conservation) - horticulture - dryland agriculture
and afforestation.

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Classify watershed and Identify factors to consider for watershed Development.
2. Apply the concepts of watershed development and planning
3. Evaluate the erosion rate and total amount of soil loss from a watershed
4. Select the flood and drought mitigation measures
5. Quantify the change in land use land/cover and its impact on hydrological processes.

Text Books:
1. Kenneth N. Brooks Peter F. Ffolliott Joseph A. Magner. Hydrology and the Management of
Watersheds. A John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Publication (4th Edition)
2. VVN, Murthy. Land and Water Management- Kalyani Pblication

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20ME301 MATERIAL SCIENCE FOR ENGINEERS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the relation between structure and properties of metallic materials.
2. To understand the strengthening mechanism of metals
3. To comprehend the various electrical and electronic properties of materials.
4. To understand origins and various types of magnetism and its applications.
5. To comprehend the transmission of light in various solids and study of photonic behavior.

UNIT I STRUCTURE OF MATERIALS 9 hours

Introduction: Historical prospective - importance of materials - Classification of Materials and its


Properties. Bonding in solids: bonding forces and energies - primary and secondary bonding.
Crystallography and Metallic structures: Unit cell - Crystallographic directions and planes, FCC, BCC,
HCP, SC and other structure – miller indices, Linear and planar densities - close- packed crystal
structures. Packing of atoms in solids. Packing factor

UNIT II CRYSTAL IMPERFECTIONS AND DIFFUSION 9 hours


Crystal Imperfections: Types, Vacancies and interstitials, Dislocations, and grain boundaries. Diffusion:
Fick’s Law of diffusion – Diffusion mechanism – Steady state and non-steady state, factors affecting
diffusion.

UNIT III ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9 hours


Introduction and Electrical Conduction: Ohm’s Law, Electrical Conductivity, Electronic and Ionic
Conduction - Energy Band Structures in Solids, Electron Mobility - Electrical Resistivity of Metals Semi
conductivity: Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconduction - Temperature Dependence of Carrier
Concentration, Factors that Affect Carrier Mobility, The Hall Effect, Semiconductor Devices.
Conduction in Ionic Materials, Electrical Properties of Polymers. Dielectric Materials: Capacitance,
Ferroelectric Materials, Piezoelectric Materials.

UNIT IV MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9 hours


Introduction and Basic Concepts, Diamagnetism, Paramagnetism, Ferromagnetism, Anti
ferromagnetism, Ferrimagnetism, Influence of Temperature on Magnetic Behavior, Domains and
Hysteresis, Magnetic Anisotropy, Soft and Hard Magnetic Materials, Magnetic Storage,
Superconductivity.

UNIT V PHOTONIC MATERIALS 9 hours


Introduction, Electronic Radiation in Vacuum; Reflection, Refraction, and absorption in materials;
Absorption and Chemical Bonding: Color, X-Ray absorption, Photon absorption Devices - Photon
Emission: X-Ray Emission, Emission of electromagnetic radiation and devices: LED’s, OLEDs and
LASERs. Optical Fibers in communication

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course students will be able:
1. To develop deep knowledge of crystal structure and effect of structure on the properties of the
materials
2. To demonstrate knowledge of various imperfections in crystal, and diffusion mechanism in materials
3. To explain the origins of various electronic and electrical properties in the materials
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

4. To understand the concept of magnetism, its origin and types, while choosing the right material for
the given application
5. To summarize various optical properties of the material and light’s transmission behavior

Text Books:

1. W. Callister, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Wiley, 7th Edition, 2007.


2. Charles M. Gilmore, “Materials Science and Engineering Properties”, Cengage Learning, SI
Edition, 2016

Reference Books
1. Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep P. Phule, “The Science and Engineering of Materials”, Cengage
Learning, 5th Edition, 2006.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20ME302 ELEMENTS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Objectives:
Students belonging to all branches of Engineering are made to learn following fundamental topics
related to mechanical engineering:
1. To teach students the basic concepts of Thermodynamics.
2. To teach students the basic Classification and working principles of boilers and turbines.
3. To teach students about IC engines, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning systems.
4. To teach students about engineering materials and casting manufacturing processes.
5. To teach students and machines tools and manufacturing systems.

UNIT I THERMODYNAMICS 9 hours

Basic concepts of Thermodynamics: Introduction, Important terminologies used in


thermodynamics, Specific heat capacity, First law of thermodynamics, Second law of thermodynamics,
Reversible and irreversible processes, the Carnot cycle and the Clausius inequality.

UNIT II BOILERS, TURBINES AND PUMPS 9 hours


Boilers: Introduction to boilers, Classification of boilers, requirements of a good boiler, Cochran,
Babcock, Locomotive, and Lancashire boilers.
Turbines: Hydraulic Turbines-Classification and specification, Principles, and operation of Pelton wheel
turbine, Francis turbine, and Kaplan turbine (elementary treatment only).
Hydraulic Pumps: Introduction, Classification, and specification of pumps, reciprocating pump, and
centrifugal pump.

UNIT III IC ENGINES AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 9 hours


Internal Combustion Engines: Classification, I.C. Engines parts, 2 and 4 stroke petrol and 4-stroke
diesel engines, Working principle of IC engines, Valve timing diagrams, Otto cycle, Diesel cycle, and
Dual cycle. Refrigeration and Air conditioning Refrigeration – Introduction, Refrigerator, and Heat
pump, Components of refrigeration system, Types of refrigeration system, and Type of refrigerants.

UNIT IV MATERIALS, CASTING AND TRANSMISSION 9 hours


Engineering Materials: Introduction, mechanical properties of engineering materials, mechanical testing
of engineering materials, Impact test, and Classification of engineering materials.
Casting: Introduction to casting processes, Classification of casting processes, Sand casting, and special
casting methods.
Power Transmission Devices: Introduction, belt drive, rope drive, Chain drive, Gear drive,
Classification of gears.

UNIT V TOOLS AND MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 9 hours


Machine Tools: Introduction, Mechanism of metal cutting, Geometry of single point cutting tool,
Orthogonal and oblique metal cutting, Lathe, and Milling machines.
Manufacturing Systems Introduction, Computer Integrated Manufacturing, CAD/CAM, Numerical
Control (NC), Computer Numerical Control, and Dynamics Numerical Control.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. State first, second and third law of thermodynamics.
2. Sketch components of boilers and turbines.
3. State working principle of IC engines and R& AC systems.
4. Fair understanding of application and usage of various engineering materials, Casting process, and
different types of drives with applications.
5. Explain the role of Computers in manufacturing systems.

Text Books:
1. “Basic Mechanical Engineering” by Pravin Kumar, Pearson Edition ISBN: 9789332505759,
9789332505759.

Reference Books
1. George E Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017
2. S. Kalpakjian and S. R. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engg, and Technology”, 7th Edition, Pearson,
2018
3. P K Nag, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20EEE301 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20EEE101

Course Description:
This course deals with basics of electrical wiring systems for residential, commercial and industrial
consumers, and its representation with standard symbols and drawings, various components of
industrial electrical systems and its sizing and control aspects of industrial electrical system using PLC
and SCADA.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the electrical wiring systems for residential, commercial and industrial consumers.
2. To learn the representation of systems with standard symbols and drawings.
3. To understand the various components of industrial electrical systems.
4. To analyze and select the proper size of several electrical system components.
5. To study the control aspects of industrial electrical system using PLC and SCADA

UNIT I ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9 hours

LT system wiring components, selection of cables, wires, switches, distribution box, metering system,
Tariff structure, protection components- Fuse, MCB, MCCB, ELCB, inverse current characteristics,
symbols, single line diagram (SLD) of a wiring system, Contactor, Isolator, Relays, MPCB, Electric
shock and Electrical safety practices.

UNIT II RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL ELECTRICAL 9 hours


SYSTEMS
Types of residential and commercial wiring systems, general rules and guidelines for installation, load
calculation and sizing of wire, rating of main switch, distribution board and protection devices, earthing
system calculations, requirements of commercial installation, deciding lighting scheme and number of
lamps, earthing of commercial installation, selection and sizing of components.

UNIT III ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS 9 hours


Understanding various terms regarding light, lumen, intensity, candle power, lamp efficiency, specific
consumption, glare, space to height ratio, waste light factor, depreciation factor, various illumination
schemes, Incandescent lamps and modern luminaries like CFL, LED and their operation, energy saving
in illumination systems, design of a lighting scheme for a residential and commercial premises, flood
lighting.

UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL SUBSTATION SYSTEMS 9 hours


HT connection, industrial substation, Transformer selection, Industrial loads, motors, starting of
motors, SLD, Cable and Switchgear selection, Lightning Protection, Earthing design, Power factor
correction – kVAR calculations, type of compensation, Introduction to PCC, MCC panels.
Specifications of LT Breakers, MCB and other LT panel components.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM AUTOMATION 9 hours


DG Systems, UPS System, Electrical Systems for the elevators, Battery banks, Sizing the DG, UPS and
Battery Banks, Selection of UPS and Battery Banks.
Study of basic PLC, Role of in automation, advantages of process automation, PLC based control
system design, Panel Metering and Introduction to SCADA system for distribution automation.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Discuss the various component representation involved in the design of electrical wiring for
Low Tension.
2. Understand the guidelines for wiring of household and commercial buildings.
3. Understand the various components of illumination in industrial electrical systems.
4. Select the proper size of various electrical system components required for designing
different electrical wiring systems.
5. Understand the control aspects of industrial electrical system using PLC and SCADA.

Text Books:
1. S. L. Uppal and G. C. Garg, “Electrical Wiring, Estimating & Costing”, Khanna publishers, 2008
2. K. B. Raina, “Electrical Design, Estimating & Costing”, New age International, 2007.

Reference Books
1. S. Singh and R. D. Singh, “Electrical estimating and costing”, Dhanpat Rai and Co., 1997.
2. H. Joshi, “Residential Commercial and Industrial Systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2008.
3. https://www.bis.gov.in/

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20EEE302 INTRODUCTION TO MEMS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20EEE101

Course Description:
This course describes about manufacturing, modeling and applications of MEMS.

Course Objectives:
1. To know the fundamentals of MEMS materials, their physical properties and Principles of
operation of MEMS devices.
2. To know various MEMS microfabrication technologies.
3. To provide various MEMS technology for mechanical, optical, and chemical sensors and
actuator

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 hours

Overview – History and industry perspectives – Working principles – Mechanics and dynamics ––
Scaling law

UNIT II MICRO SENSORS & ACTUATORS 9 hours


Micro sensors: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, gyroscopes-Micro actuators: comb drive actuators –
Micro-electromechanical systems.

UNIT III MICRO MANUFACTURING 9 hours


Materials for MEMS and Microsystems- Micro fabrication processes: Photolithography, Ion
Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, Chemical Vapour Deposition- Physical Vapour Deposition, Micro
manufacturing: Bulk micromachining, surface micromachining, LIGA Process- Packaging.

UNIT IV MODELING IN MEMS 9 hours


Micro system design: Finite Element Methods-– Modeling of simulation – piezoelectric, Gyroscope

UNIT V MEMS APPLICATIONS 9 hours


Micro fluids-sensors for turbulence measurement and control, micro-actuators for flow control,
RFMEMS- filters, Oscillators and phase shifters, Optical MEMS, micro robotics – Case studies
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Explain the fundamentals of MEMS materials, their physical properties and Principles of
operation of MEMS devices.
2. Analyze the Micro sensors and actuators and its fabrication.
3. Explain the materials for MEMS and Microsystems.
4. Design MEMS using microfabrication techniques.
5. Explain the advantages of MEMS technology for mechanical, optical, and chemical sensors
and actuator

Text Books:
1. Chang Liu, ‘Foundations of MEMS’, Pearson Education Inc., 2006

2. G.K. Ananthsuresh et al ,’Micro and Smart Systems’, Wiley, India, 2010


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Reference Books
1. NadimMaluf, “An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design”, ArtechHouse, 2000.
2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000.
3. James J.Allen, micro electro mechanical system design, CRC Press published in 2005
4. Stephen D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20CST301 OPERATING SYSTEMS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: 20CSE101, 20CSE102

Course Description:
Student will understand Modern Operating System and their principles. The course will cover theory as
well as practice aspects of a subject through scheduled lectures and labs, course will cover details of
processes, CPU scheduling, memory management, file system, storage subsystem, and input/output
management.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems
2. To understand Processes and Threads
3. To analyze Scheduling algorithms
4. To understand the concept of Deadlocks
5. To analyze various memory management schemes
6. To understand I/O management and File systems

UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9 hours

Operating system overview: Objectives – functions - Computer System Organization-Operating System


Structure - Operating System Operations- System Calls, System Programs.

UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9 hours


Processes: Process Concept - Process Scheduling - Operations on Processes – Inter process
Communication. Process Synchronization: The Critical-Section Problem - Semaphores - Classic
Problems of Synchronization – Monitors. Case Study: Windows 10 operating system

UNIT III SCHEDULING AND DEADLOCK MANAGEMENT 9 hours


CPU Scheduling: Scheduling Criteria - Scheduling Algorithms. Deadlocks: Deadlock Characterization
- Methods for Handling Deadlocks - Deadlock Prevention - Deadlock Avoidance - Deadlock Detection
- Recovery from Deadlock. Case Study: MAC operating system

UNIT IV STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9 hours


Main Memory: Swapping - Contiguous Memory Allocation, Segmentation, Paging. Virtual Memory:
Demand Paging - Page Replacement - Allocation of Frames - Thrashing. Case Study: Android operating
system

UNIT V MASS STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9 hours


Mass Storage Structure: Disk Structure - Disk Scheduling - Disk Management. File-System Interface:
File Concepts, Directory Structure - File Sharing – Protection. File System. Case Study: Linux operating
system

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand operating system program, structures and operations with system calls.
2. Apply the process management concept for real time problems
3. Illustrate CPU scheduling algorithms and to handle the deadlock for the given situation.
4. Explain the concepts of various memory management techniques
5. Summarize the storage concepts of disk and file.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Books:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, 10th
Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2020.
2. Richard Petersen, “Linux: The Complete Reference”, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008

Reference Books
1. Operating Systems - Internals and Design Principles. Stallings, 6th Edition2009. Pearson education.
2. William Stallings, “Operating Systems – Internals and Design Principles”, 7th Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2011.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20CSE301 JAVA PROGRAMMING


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
Basics of Object-Oriented Programming - objects, classes, polymorphism, inheritance, static and
dynamic binding. Object Oriented Programming using Java-classes, interfaces, inheritance,
polymorphism, method dispatch, features for encapsulation and modularity.
Course Objectives:
1. Understand object-oriented programming concepts, and apply them in solving problems.
2. Learn the principles of inheritance and polymorphism; and demonstrate how they relate to the design
of abstract classes.
3. To Introduce the implementation of packages and interfaces.
4. Learn the concepts of exception handling and multithreading.
5. Learn the design of Graphical User Interface using applets and swing controls.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOPS CONCEPTS AND CLASSES 9 hours

Introduction to Object Oriented Programming, Java buzzwords, Java Programming Basics, Sample
programs, Data types and operators, Control statements.
Classes: Classes, Objects, Methods, Constructors, this and static keywords, Method and Constructor
Overloading, Access modifiers, Polymorphism
Arrays: One Dimensional and multi-dimensional arrays.

UNIT II STRINGS, INHERITANCE, INTERFACES, AND PACKAGES 9 hours


Strings: Strings, String Handling - Inheritance: Basics, Usage of Super, Multi-level hierarchy, Method
overriding, Abstract class, Final keyword. - Interfaces: Creating, Implementing, Using, Extending, and
Nesting of interfaces - Packages: Defining, Finding and Importing packages, Member Access.

UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING &MULTI-THREADING 9 hours


Exception Handling: Fundamentals, Types, Multiple catch clauses, Nested try blocks, Thrown Class,
Using Finally and Throws, Built-in exceptions, User-defined exceptions.
Multi-threading: Thread Class, Runnable interface, creating multiple threads, life cycle of thread,
thread properties, synchronization, thread communication, suspending, resuming and stopping threads.

UNIT IV I/O STREAMS AND COLLECTION FRAME WORK CLASSES 9 hours


I/O Streams: Byte Stream Classes and Character Stream Classes.
Collection Frame work : Hierarchy of collection framework, Array-List, Linked-List, Vector, Stack,
Queue, Priority Queue, Hash Set, Linked Hash Set, Tree Set.

UNIT V GUI PROGRAMMING AND EVENT HANDLING 9 hours


Swing – Introduction, limitations of AWT, MVC architecture, components, containers, Event Handling-
Handling mouse and keyboard events, Exploring Swing- JApplet, JFrame and JComponent, Icons and
Labels, text fields, buttons – The JButton class, Check boxes, Radio buttons, Combo boxes, Tabbed
Panes, Scroll Panes, Trees, and Tables. JDBC: Connecting to Database, querying a database and
processing the results, updating data with JDBC.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Choose object-oriented programming concepts for problem solving.
2. Create and use packages and interfaces.
3. Develop multithreaded applications with synchronization.
4. Provide computed based solutions by using java collection framework and I/O classes.
5. Design GUI based applications.

Text Books:
1. Java The Complete Reference, Herbert Schildt, MC GRAW HILL Education, 9thEdition, 2016.

Reference Books
Core Java Volume I – Fundamentals, by Cay S. Horstmann, Gary Cornell Pearson Education Ninth
1.
Edition
“Java Fundamentals - A Comprehensive Introduction”, Herbert Schildt and Dale Skrien,
2.
Special Indian Edition, McGrawHill, 2013.
3. “Java – How to Program”, Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, PHI.
4. “Thinking in Java”, Bruce Eckel, Pearson Education.
5. Java and Object Orientation, an introduction, John Hunt, second edition, Springer.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Open Elective – II

20CSE302 MULTIMRDIA TECHNOLOGIES


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: None

Course Description:
This course aims to introduce the students to Multimedia technologies and their usage in real world
applications. This course covers introduction to multimedia, different image, video and audio formats,
image coding and compression techniques, I/O technologies, Multimedia network and Multimedia
Security and Forensics.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide the foundation knowledge of multimedia technologies.
2. To provide the knowledge about media characteristics, compression standards, multimedia
representation, data formats, multimedia technology development.
3. To understand Multimedia security and forensics.
4. To understand multimedia components efficiently
5. To develop integrated, collaborative multimedia systems

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 hours

Introduction to Multimedia: Multimedia Elements – Multimedia applications – Evolving technologies


for Multimedia – Defining objects for Multimedia systems – Multimedia Data interface standards –
Multimedia Databases, Multimedia Architecture – Multimedia Documents

UNIT II COMPRESSION, ANIMATION , FILE FORMATS 9 hours


Compression, Decompression, Binary Image Compression Schemes, Types of Compression, Image
Compression, Video Compression, Audio Compression. Principles of animation, 2D, 3D animation.
File formats: Rich Text Format – TIFF File Format – Resource Interface File Format – MIDI File
Format - JPEG DIB File Format.

UNIT III MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGIES 9 hours


Multimedia I/O Technologies: Image Scanners – Digital Voice and Audio – Digital Camera – Video
Images – Full Motion Video -Video Motion Analysis.

UNIT IV MULTIMEDIA PROTOCOLS 9 hours


Protocol - QOS Issues - RTP, RTCP, RTSP, SIP - Media on demand –ITV - STB Broadcast
Schemes for VoD Buffer Management- Multimedia over wireless networks.

UNIT V SECURITY ATTACKS 9 hours


Multimedia encryption - Digital Watermarking. Security Attacks- Digital Forensics taxonomy,
goals/requirements - Forensic Data Acquisition -Forensics Analysis and Validation.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to
1. Understand the characteristics of different media and the representations of different multimedia
data formats.
2. Understand the characteristics of Image, Audio and Video systems and takes into considerations in
multimedia techniques design and implementation.
3. Describe different coding and compression principles and compare different compression
techniques.
4. Design multimedia components efficiently
5. Develop integrated, collaborative multimedia system

Text Books:
1. Li, Ze-Nian and Mark S. Drew, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

2. Steinmetz Ralf and K. Nahrstedt “Multimedia: Computing, Communications &


Applications”,Pearson Education, 1995.

Reference Books
1. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara, “Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications”,
Pearson Education, 2009
2. Chun-Shien Lu, “Multimedia Security : Steganography and Digital Watermarking techniques
for Protection of Intellectual Property”, Springer Inc 2007

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE-I
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – I
20ECE401 NANO ELECTRONICS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE103, 20ECE108

Course Description:
This course provides an overview of Semiconductor Physics and carrier transport phenomenon. It
illustrates Quantum Mechanics, Nano-materials, Nanoscale MOSFET Transistors and their
characteristics.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Apply the knowledge of Quantum physics to illustrate energy band structure.
2. Understand the basic physics of Kronig-Penney Model.
3. Understand the fundamentals of operation of the semiconductor electronic devices and their
characteristics.
4. Understand the band theory of solids and concept of scaling.
5. Understand the features of nanomaterials for electronics device applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 hours

Introduction to nanotechnology, meso-structures, Basics of Quantum Mechanics: Schrodinger


equation, Density of States.

UNIT II BAND THEORY 9 hours


Particle in a box Concepts, Degeneracy. Band Theory of Solids. Kronig-Penny Model. Brillouin
Zones.

UNIT III SHRINK-DOWN APPROACHES 9 hours


Introduction, CMOS Scaling, The nanoscale MOSFET, Finfets, Vertical MOSFETs, limits to scaling,
system integration limits (interconnect issues etc.).

UNIT IV NANO DIODES 9 hours


Resonant Tunneling Diode, Coulomb dots, Quantum blockade, Single electron transistors, Carbon
nanotube electronics.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9 hours


Band structure and transport, devices, applications, 2D semiconductors and electronic devices,
Graphene, atomistic simulation.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand various aspects of nano-technology and energy band structure of nanomaterials.
2. Understand the fundamental features of nano-materials and appropriate use in solving practical
problems.
3. Understand the operation of semiconductor devices.
4. Understand the band theory of solids and concept of scaling for designing of semiconductor
devices.
5. Understand the various applications of nanomaterials.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Book(s)
1. G.W. Hanson, Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics, Pearson, 2009.

2. W. Ranier, Nanoelectronics and Information Technology (Advanced Electronic Material and


Novel Devices), Wiley-VCH, 2003.
Reference Books
1. K.E. Drexler, Nano systems, Wiley, 1992.

2. J.H. Davies, The Physics of Low-Dimensional Semiconductors, Cambridge University Press,


1998.
3. C.P. Poole, F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley,2003

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – I
20ECE402 ELECTRONICS PACKAGING AND TESTING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE103

Course Description:
This course gives the fundamental overview of electronic systems packaging, issues in packaging,
chip packages, surface mount technology and thermal effect.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Know the basic concepts, levels, and applications of Electronic Systems Packaging.
2. Understand the electrical issues in electronic packaging.
3. Study and understand the steps involved in designing chip package.
4. Understand the different levels of manufacturing in PCB
5. Understand the various physical issues considered in testing the chip

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING 9 hours

Functions of an electronic package, Packaging hierarchy, Packaging aspects of handled products-


MEMS packaging, Medical electronics packaging, Packaging trends and challenges, Driving forces
on packaging technology, Materials for Microelectronic packaging, Packaging material properties,
Material for high density interconnect substrate, Wafer fabrication.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL ISSUES IN PACKAGING 9 hours


Electrical Issues of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power Distribution, Electromagnetic
Interference, Transmission Lines, Clock Distribution, Noise Sources, Digital and RF Issues. Design
Process Electrical Design: Interconnect Capacitance, Resistance and Inductance fundamentals;
Packaging roadmaps - Hybrid circuits - Resistive, Capacitive and Inductive parasitic.

UNIT III CHIP PACKAGES 9 hours


IC Assembly – Purpose and requirements, Wire bonding, Tape Automated Bonding, Flip Chip, Wafer
Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level burn – in and test. Single chip packaging: functions, types,
materials processes, properties, characteristics, trends. Multi chip packaging: types, design,
comparison, trends. System – in - package (SIP); Passives: discrete, integrated, and embedded.

UNIT IV PCB, SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND THERMAL 9 hours


CONSIDERATIONS
Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard fabrication, Micro via Boards. Board
Assembly: Surface Mount Technology, Through Hole Technology, Process Control and Design challenges.
Thermal Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal conductivity and resistance, Conduction,
convection and radiation – Cooling requirements.

UNIT V TESTING 9 hours


Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch and fatigue, Thermo
mechanically induced, electrically induced, and chemically induced failures. Electrical Testing:
System level electrical testing, Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design for Testability.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the basic concepts and applications of Electronic Systems Packaging
2. Know the electrical issues in electronic packaging.
3. To analyze and test the electronic system in packages.
4. Understand the surface mount technology and their thermal consideration.
5. Develop system level electrical testing.
Text Book(s)
1. Blackwell (Ed), The electronic packaging handbook, CRC Press, 2000.

2. Tummala, Rao R, Microelectronics packaging handbook, McGraw Hill, 2008.

Reference Books
1.
Bosshart, Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology, TataMcGraw Hill, 1988.
2. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, Electronic Product design, Wiley India, 2011

3. R.S.Khandpur, Printed Circuit Board, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – I
20ECE403 BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE103, 20ECE106

Course Description:
This course provides the fundamental knowledge on applications of electronics in bio-medical signal
measurements and processing, bio-medical instrumentation and imaging techniques.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Acquire the basic knowledge on human physiology and biological transducers.
2. Learn about bio-electrodes and bio-amplifiers used in bio-signal acquisition.
3. Understand the working principle of bio-medical measuring instruments.
4. Study various types of imaging techniques used in medicine.
5. Learn the applications of medical instrumentation in designing artificial medical aids

UNIT I HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOMEDICAL TRANSDUCERS 9 hours

Introduction to human physiology - Biomedical transducers for measuring displacement, velocity,


force, acceleration, potential, dissolved ions and gases.

UNIT II BIO-ELECTRODES AND AMPLIFIERS 9 hours


Introduction to bio-potential, Bio-electrodes, Typical waveforms and characteristics of ECG, EMG
and EEG, Bio-potential amplifiers for ECG, EMG and EEG – Lead systems and recording methods.

UNIT III BIOMEDICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 9 hours


Measurement of blood pressure and temperature, Blood flow meter, Cardiac output measurement,
Respiratory measurement, Blood cell counter, Impedance plethysmography.

UNIT IV MEDICAL IMAGING 9 hours


X-ray, Computed Tomography (CT), Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), Nuclear imaging,
Ultrasonic Imaging.

UNIT V PROSTHESES AND AIDS 9 hours


Pacemakers, Defibrillators, Heart-lung machine, Artificial kidney, Aids for the handicapped, Safety
aspects
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the applications of biological transducers in medical field.
2. Analyze the design of bio-electrodes and bio-amplifiers.
3. Apply suitable measuring instruments to measure various medical parameters.
4. Understand and test various imaging techniques used in bio-medical diagnosis.
5. Analyze the applications of artificial medical aids.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Book(s)
1. W.F. Ganong, Review of Medical Physiology, 26th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2019.
2. J.G. Websster, ed., Medical Instrumentation, 3rd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd. 2009

Reference Books
1. A.M. Cook and J.G. Webster, eds., Medical Devices and Human Engineering, Taylor & Francis,
2014
2. R.S.Khandpur,“HandbookofBiomedicalInstrumentation”,2ndedition,TataMcGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2005
3. LeslieCromwell,“BiomedicalInstrumentationandMeasurement”,Prentice-Hall, New Delhi,
2011.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – I
20ECE404 INTERNET OF THINGS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
The Internet of Things (IoT) is a network of a wide variety of devices like vehicles, humans, soil
etc. These devices gather data using sensors, which can be used for monitoring or control. This
course is an introduction to the embedded devices, communication protocols and APIs used in
IoT
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Introduce the fundamental concepts of IoT and physical computing
2. Expose the student to a variety of embedded boards and IoT Platforms
3. Create a basic understanding of the communication protocols in IoT communications.
4. Familiarize the student with application program interfaces for IoT.
5. Enable students to create simple IoT applications.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IOT 9 hours

The Internet of Things: An Overview; The Flavor of the Internet of Things; The “Internet” of
“Things”; The Technology of the Internet of Things; Enchanted Objects; Who is Making the
Internet of Things?; Design Principles for Connected Devices; Calm and Ambient Technology;
Privacy; Keeping Secrets; Whose Data Is It Anyway?; Web Thinking for Connected Devices;
Small Pieces, Loosely Joined; First-Class Citizens On The Internet; Graceful Degradation;
Affordances

UNIT II EMBEDDED DEVICES – I (ARDUINO) 9 hours


Embedded Computing Basics; Microcontrollers; System-on-Chips; Choosing Your Platform;
Arduino; Developing on the Arduino; Some Notes on the Hardware; Openness;

UNIT III EMBEDDED DEVICES – II (RASPBERRY PI) 9 hours


Raspberry Pi ; Cases and Extension Boards; Developing on the Raspberry Pi; Some Notes on the
Hardware; Openness; Other notable platforms; Mobile phones and tablets; Plug Computing: Always-
on Internet of Things

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION IN THE IOT 9 hours


Internet Principles; Internet Communications: An Overview; IP; TCP; The IP Protocol Suite (TCP/IP);
UDP ; IP Addresses; DNS ; Static IP Address Assignment ; Dynamic IP Address Assignment; IPv6 ;
MAC Addresses ; TCP and UDP Ports ; An Example: HTTP Ports ; Other Common Ports; Application
Layer Protocols- HTTP; HTTPS: Encrypted HTTP ; Other Application Layer Protocols.

UNIT V PROTOTYPING ONLINE COMPONENTS 9 hours


Getting Started with an API; Mashing Up APIs; Scraping; Legalities; Writing a New API; Clockodillo;
Security; Implementing the API; Using Curl to Test; Going Further; Real-Time Reactions; Polling;
Comet; Other Protocols; MQ Telemetry Transport; Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol;
Constrained Application Protocol.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Interpret the design principles that govern connected devices and select a platform for a
particular embedded computing application
2. Develop simple applications using Arduino microcontroller
3. Develop simple applications using Raspberry Pi
4. Utilize the Internet communication protocols for IoT applications
5. Design and develop a solution for a given application using APIs

Text Book(s)
1. Adrian McEwen, Hakim Cassimally, Designing the Internet of Things, Wiley Publications,
2014, ISBN:978-1-118-43062-0.
2. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, Internet of Things: A Hands-On Approach, Universities
Press, 2015. ISBN: 978-8173719547

Reference Books
1. Pethuru Raj, Anupama C. Raman, The Internet of Things, Enabling technologies and use
cases, CRC Press. 2017. ISBN: 978-1498761284.
2. Matt Richardson & Shawn Wallace, Make:Getting Started with Raspberry Pi, O'Reilly, 3rd
Edition, 2016, ISBN:978-1-680-45246-4.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – I
20ECE405 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE107

Course Description:
The course will provide strong foundation on embedded system design. The course covers theory and
logic to develop programming expertise. Student will understand application of embedded
microcontrollers ARM.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To provide knowledge on the basics, building blocks of Embedded System.
2. To provide basic of operating system and Real time programming languages
3. To teach automation using scheduling algorithms and Real time operating system.
4. To understand firmware design and Architectural Support for Operating Systems for
various applications
5. To discuss on different Phases & Modeling of a new embedded product.

UNIT I THE CONCEPT OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9 hours

Embedded System Design, Introduction to Embedded Hardware Elements, Sensors and Actuators,
Embedded Processors, Memory Architectures. Embedded System vs. General Purpose computing
systems, Examples of embedded systems, Embedded memories, Embedded microcontroller cores

UNIT II SOFTWARE ASPECTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS – I 9 hours


Operating System Basics, types of Operating Systems, Task and Task States, Semaphores and shared
Data, RTOS services and design using RTOS, Tasks, Process and Threads, Multiprocessing and
Multitasking, Real time programming languages.

UNIT III SOFTWARE ASPECTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS- II 9 hours


Task Communication: Shared Memory, Message Passing, Remote Procedure Call and Sockets, Task
Synchronization: Task Communication Synchronization Issues, Task Synchronization Techniques,
Device Drivers, how to Choose an RTOS, Integrated Development Environment (IDE).

UNIT IV FIRMWARE AND ARCHITECTURAL SUPPORT FOR 9 hours


OPERATING SYSTEMS
Firmware and Bootloader, an introduction to operating systems, The ARM system control
coprocessor Embedded ARM Applications, CP15 protection unit registers, CP15 MMU registers,
ARM MMU architecture, Synchronization, Context switching, Input/Output, Example and exercises,
The ARM7500 and ARM7500FE.

UNIT V MODELLING WITH HARDWARE/SOFTWARE DESIGN 9 hours


APPROACHES
Modelling embedded systems- embedded software development approach -Overview of UML
modelling with UML, UML Diagrams-Hardware/Software Partitioning, Co-Design Approaches for
System Specification and modelling- Co-Synthesis- features comparing Single-processor
Architectures & Multi-Processor Architectures-design approach on parallelism in uniprocessors &
Multiprocessors.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. To understand the functionalities of processor internal blocks, with their requirement
2. Understand the basics of operating systems and then to learn the programming language used
for real time operating system.
3. systems and related terms.
4. Understand the role and features of RT operating system, that makes multitask execution
possible by processors.
5. Understand that using multiple CPU based on either hard-core or softcore helps data
overhead management with processing.
Text Book(s)
1. M.A. Mazdi & J.G. Mazdi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded System, Pearson Education
India , 2013
2. Andrew N. Sloss & Dominic Symes, ARM System Developer’s Guide Designing and
Optimizing System Software, Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 2004.
Reference Books
1. Steve Furber, Arm System-On-Chip Architecture, 2000.

2. J.K. Peckol, Embedded Systems A contemporary Design Tool, Wiley Student Edition , 2008

3. K J Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Application, Penram


International Publishing (India)
4. S. Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Elsevier, 2009

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Professional Elective – I
20ECE406 ADVANCED DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN USING VERILOG HDL
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE102

Course Description:
The course will provide advanced knowledge on combinational and sequential design using Verilog
HDL. The course covers theory and methods to develop expertise in the field of Digital Logic Design
using Verilog. Student will understand application of advanced digital logic designs in FPGAs and
analyze the behaviour through Verilog HDL programming.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the digital design methodology, and revise the combinational and sequential
logic concepts.
2. Program combinational and sequential logic circuits using Verilog HDL.
3. Synthesize combinational and sequential logic circuits.
4. Understand FPGA architectures.
5. Design digital logics in FPGAs

UNIT I COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 hours

Digital Design Methodology; Combinational Circuits: Half Adder, Full Adder, Comparators,
Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers, Parity Generators and Checkers; Data Storage Elements: Latches,
Flip-Flops, Register, Memory, ROM, RAM; Sequential Circuits: State Representations, Timing in
Sequential Circuits, Shift Registers, Counters.

UNIT II LOGIC DESIGN WITH VERILOG 9 hours


Introduction to Verilog; Gate Level Modelling, Data Flow Modelling, Behavioural Level Modelling,
Switch Level Modelling; Digital system design using Verilog HDL.

UNIT III SYNTHESIS OF COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL 9 hours


LOGIC USING VERILOG
Introduction to Synthesis: Logic Synthesis, RTL Synthesis, High Level Synthesis; Synthesis of
Combinational Logic: Synthesis of Priority Structure, Exploiting Logical Don’t-Care Conditions,
ASIC Cells and Resource Sharing; Synthesis of Sequential Logic: Synthesis of Latches, Flip-flops,
State Machines.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO FPGA ARCHITECTURES 9 hours


Overview, Programming Technologies, Configurable Logic Block, FPGA Routing Architectures.

UNIT V DESIGNING WITH FPGA 9 hours


Design Flow for FPGAs, Prototyping with FPGAs, and Debugging.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Design a combinational and sequential circuits.
2. Understand the basics of Verilog and can design any combinational and sequential circuits
using Verilog HDL.
3. Understand the different Synthesis methods and can synthesize the combinational and
sequential circuits.
4. Understand the different FPGA architectures.
5. Implement any digital system on FPGA

Text Book(s)
1. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, PHI, 2005

2. T. R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, “Design through Verilog HDL”, WSE, IEEE
Press, 2004.

Reference Books
1. Cem Unsalan, Bora Tar, “Digital System Design with FPGA: Implementation Using Verilog and
VHDL”, ISBN: 9781259837906, McGraw Hill Publications.
2. Shivakumar S. Chonnad and Needamangalam B. Balachander, “Verilog: Frequently Asked
Questions: Language, Applications, and Extensions”, ISBN: 978-0387228341, Publisher:
Springer, 2007.
3. Simon Monk, “Programming FPGAs-Getting Started with Verilog”, ISBN: 978- 1259643767,
McGraw Hill Publications. ISBN: 978-0982497098, LBE Books.
4. Steve Kilts, “Advanced FPGA Design: Architecture, Implementation, and Optimization”, ISBN:
9780470054376, Publishers: Wiley, 2007
5. Richard C. Dorf and John V. Oldfield, “Field-Programmable Gate Arrays: Reconfigurable
Logic for Rapid Prototyping and Implementation of Digital Systems” ISBN: 9788126516612,
Publisher: Wiley, 2008.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – I


B.Tech. II Year I Semester
20ENG601 CORPORATE COMMUNICATION
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite: 20ENG201

Course Description:
English is practical and it is a must for any institution to provide students with opportunities to indulge
in actively applying their language skills. Thus the Communication Skills Lab facilitates students with
adequate opportunities to put their communication skills in use. It also accommodates peer learning
by engaging students in various interactive sessions. This lab will be accompanied by a practical lab
component.

Course Objectives:

This course enables the students to –


1. Focus on their interactive skills
2. Develop their communicative competency
3. Fortify their employability skills
4. Empower their confidence and overcome their shyness
5. Become effective in their overall performance in the industry

UNIT I LISTENING SKILLS 8 hours


Listening/watching interviews, conversations, documentaries, etc.; Listening to lectures, discussions
from TV/Radio/Podcast.

UNIT II SPEAKING 10 hours


Articulation of sounds; Intonation.; Conversational skills (Formal and Informal); Group Discussion;
Making effective Oral presentations: Role play.

UNIT III READING SKILLS 8 hours

Reading for main ideas; Applying background knowledge to predict content; Skimming; Scanning;
Making inferences; Reading different genres of texts ranging from newspapers to creative writing;
Reading Comprehension.

UNIT IV WRITING SKILLS 9 hours


Writing an introduction; Essay structure; Descriptive paragraphs; Writing a conclusion.
Writing job applications and resume; Emails; Letters; Memorandum; Reports; Writing abstracts and
summaries; Interpreting visual texts.

UNIT V INTERVIEW SKILLS 10 hours


Different types of interviews: Answering questions and offering information; Mock interviews; Body
Language.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to—
1. Read articles from magazines and newspapers
2. Participate effectively in informal conversations
3. Introduce themselves and their friends and express opinions in English
4. Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
5. Write short essays of a general kind, draft Reports and personal letters and emails in English.

Text Books:
1. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata; Communication Skills; Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez; Soft Skills and Employability Skills; Cambridge
University Press, 2018.
3. S.P. Dhanavel; English and Communication Skills for Students of Science and Engineering;
Orient Blackswan, 2009.
4. M. Ashraf Rizvi; Effective Technical Communication; Tata Mc Graw Hill Co. ltd, 2005.

Reference:
1. Dr. M.Adithan; Study Skills for Professional Students in Higher Education; S.Chand & Co.
Pvt., 2014.
2. Guy Brook Hart & Vanessa Jakeman; Complete IELTS: Cambridge University Press, 2014.
3. Vanessa Jakeman & Clare Mcdowell; Action Plan for IELTS: Cambridge University Press,
2006.
4. Guy Brook Hart; Instant IELTS; Cambridge University Press, 2004.
5. S.P.Bakshi & Richa Sharma; Descriptive General English; Arihant Publications, 2012.
6. Charles Browne, Brent Culligan 7 Joseph Phillips; In Focus (level 2); Cambridge University
Press.
7. Steven Gershon; Present Yourself 2 (second edition); Cambridge University Press.
8. Leo Jones; Let’s Talk 3 (second edition); Cambridge University Press.
9. Nutall J. C.; Reading Comprehension; Orient Blackswan.
10 www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
11. https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/english-grammar
12. https://www.rong-chang.com/

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation, Practical Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – II


B. Tech II Year II Semester
20ECE601 PYTHON FOR DATA SCIENCE
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite 20CSE101

Course Description:
This course is designed to equipping students to be able to use python programming for solving data
science problems.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Train the students in solving computational problems
2. Elucidate solving mathematical problems using Python programming language
3. Understand the fundamentals of Python programming concepts and its applications.
4. Practical understanding of building different types of models and their evaluation

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NUMPY 6 hours

Introduction to Data Science and its importance - Data Science and Big data-, Establishing
computational environments for data scientists using Python with IPython and Jupyter. NumPy Basics:
Arrays and Vectorized Computation- The NumPy ndarray- Creating ndarrays- Data Types for
ndarrays- Arithmetic with NumPy Arrays- Basic Indexing and Slicing - Boolean Indexing-
Transposing Arrays and Swapping Axes. Universal Functions: Fast Element-Wise Array Functions-
Mathematical and Statistical Methods-Sorting Unique and Other Set Logic.
 Create NumPy arrays from Python Data Structures, Intrinsic NumPy objects and Random
Functions
 Manipulation of NumPy arrays- Indexing, Slicing, Reshaping, Joining and Splitting
 Computation on NumPy arrays using Universal Functions and Mathematical methods

UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION WITH PYTHON 6 hours


Essential Functionality: Dropping Entries Indexing, Selection, and Filtering- Summarizing and
Computing Descriptive Statistics- Unique Values, Value Counts, and Membership. Reading and
Writing Data in Text Format
.
 Import a CSV file and perform various Statistical and Comparison operations on
rows/columns.
 Write a program to compute summary statistics such as mean, median, mode, standard
deviation and variance of the given different types of data.

UNIT III PANDAS DATA STRUCTURES WITH PYTHON 6 hours


Introduction to pandas Data Structures: Series, Data Frame,
 Create Pandas Series and Data Frame from various inputs.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION WITH PYTHON 6 hours

Function Application and Mapping- Sorting and Ranking, Plotting with pandas: Line Plots, Bar Plots,
Histograms and Density Plots, Scatter or Point Plots

 Import any CSV file to Pandas Data Frame and perform the following:
(a) Visualize the first and last 10 records
(b) Get the shape, index and column details.
(c) Select/Delete the records(rows)/columns based on conditions.
(d) Perform ranking and sorting operations.
(e) Do required statistical operations on the given columns.
(f) Find the count and uniqueness of the given categorical values.
(g) Rename single/multiple columns.
 Import any CSV file to Pandas Data Frame and perform the following:
(a) Handle missing data by detecting and dropping/ filling missing values.
(b) Transform data using apply () and map () method.
(c) Detect and filter outliers.
(d) Perform Vectorized String operations on Pandas Series.
(e) Visualize data using Line Plots, Bar Plots, Histograms, Density Plots and Scatter
Plots.

UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING USING PYTHON 6 hours


Introduction Machine Learning: Categories of Machine Learning algorithms, Feature Engineering-
Naive Bayes Classification - Linear Regression – k-Means Clustering.

 Write a program to demonstrate Linear Regression analysis with residual plots on a given
data set.
 Write a program to implement the Naïve Bayesian classifier for a sample training data set
stored as a .CSV file. Compute the accuracy of the classifier, considering few test data sets.
 Write a program to implement k-Nearest Neighbour algorithm to classify the iris data set.
Print both correct and wrong predictions using Python ML library classes.
 Write a program to implement k-Means clustering algorithm to cluster the set of data stored
in .CSV file. Compare the results of various “k” values for the quality of clustering.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Illustrate the use of various data structures.
2. Analyze and manipulate Data using Numpy and Pandas.
3. Creating static, animated, and interactive visualizations using Matplotlib.
4. Understand the implementation procedures for the machine learning algorithms.
5. Identify and apply Machine Learning algorithms to solve real-world problems using
appropriate data sets.
Text Books:
1. Wes McKinney, “Python for Data Analysis: Data Wrangling with Pandas, NumPy, and IPython”,
O’Reilly, 2nd Edition,2018.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook: Essential Tools for Working with Data”,
O’Reilly, 2017.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Reference Books:
1. Y. Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Programming using Python”, Pearson,2012.
2. Francois Chollet, Deep Learning with Python, 1/e, Manning Publications Company, 2017.
3. Peter Wentworth, Jeffrey Elkner, Allen B. Downey and Chris Meyers, “How to Think Like a
Computer Scientist: Learning with Python 3”, 3rd edition, Available at
https://www.ict.ru.ac.za/Resources/cspw/thinkcspy3/thinkcspy3.pdf
4. Paul Barry, “Head First Python a Brain Friendly Guide” 2nd Edition, O’Reilly, 2016 4. Dainel
Y.Chen “Pandas for Everyone Python Data Analysis” Pearson Education, 2019

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – II


B. Tech II Year II Semester
20ECE602 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite: 18EEE101

Course Description:
This course covers the basic Characteristics of various Sensors and Transducers. It gives a brief idea
about principle and working of various Resistive Inductive and Capacitive Transducers. The
measurement of non-electrical quantities is also dealt with applications and miscellaneous transducers
used in industries are also covered.

Course Objectives:
This course enables the students to –
1. Understand the principle and operation of various Bridges
2. Know the characteristics of Resistive Transducers
3. Understand various inductive and capacitive transducers
4. Study various types of signal conditioning circuits and A/D Converters.
5. Study the Characteristics of miscellaneous transducers

UNIT I AC BRIDGES 6 hours


Introduction to Bridges -Wheat Stone Bridge, Kelvin Bridge, Schering Bridge, Anderson’s Bridge
and Maxwell Bridge.
 Measurement of Low Resistance by Kelvin’s Bridge.
 Measurement of Self Inductance using Anderson’s Bridge.
 Measurement of Capacitance using Schering Bridge

UNIT II RESISTIVE TRANSDUCERS 6 hours


Strain gauge –Types– Applications – RTD - Temperature Sensors -Thermistors – Thermocouple-
Constructions, Load Cell- Characteristics
 Calibration of Strain gauge for strain measurement
 Calibration of Resistance temperature detector
 Calibration of thermistor for temperature measurement
 Calibration of thermocouple for temperature
 Load Cell Characteristics

UNIT III INDUCTIVE AND CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCER 6 hours

Self inductive transducer – Mutual inductive transducers – Linear Variable Differential Transformer
- Piezoelectric transducer -Rotary displacement transducers -Capacitive transducer – Types,
Microphone-Speakers.
 Study and calibration of LVDT for displacement measurement
 Calibration of Capacitive transducer for displacement measurement
 Measurement of sound using microphones
 Calibration of microphone
 Calibration of rotameter
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT IV SIGNAL CONDITIONING 6 hours

Comparators- Instrumentation amplifier -Active Filters-Sample and hold circuit-A/ D Converters-


Successive approximation-ADC, Flash type ADC
 Design and testing of Digital Comparator
 Design and testing of sample and hold circuit.
 Design and testing of Active filters
 Design and testing of Voltage to frequency converter and frequency to voltage converter.
 Design and testing of Flash type Analog to Digital Converters.

UNIT V MISCELLANEOUS TRANSDUCERS 6 hours


Piezoelectric transducer – Hall Effect transducers – Smart sensors – Fiber optic sensors – Film sensors
– MEMS – Nano sensors, Gyroscope
 Design of Piezoelectric transducers using MEMS open source software (MEMS pro, SUGAR)
i. Pressure sensors
ii. Accelerometers
iii. Gyroscopes

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to
1. Apply the concepts for bridges converting a physical parameter into an electrical quantity
2. Understand the functions and characteristics different resistive transducers
3. Demonstrate the working of inductive and capacitive transducers
4. Identify various signal conditioning devices and its characteristics
5. Design Piezoelectric transducers using MEMS

Text Books:
1. Sawhney. A.K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”,
18th Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Limited, 2007.
2. Patranabis. D, “Sensors and Transducers”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

References:
1. Doebelin. E.A, “Measurement Systems – Applications and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
York, 2000. 3. John. P, Bentley, “Principles of Measurement Systems”, III Edition, Pearson
Education, 2000.
2. Murthy. D. V. S, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation, Practical Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – II


B. Tech II Year II Semester
20ECE603 MATLAB FOR ENGINEERS
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite 20MAT101, 20EEE101

Course Description:
This course introduces students to MATLAB programming, and demonstrate its use for scientific
computations. The basis of computational techniques is expounded through various coding examples
and problems. The practical ways to use MATLAB will be discussed.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand basic MATLAB commands and elementary functions
2. Study and implement mathematical operations and matrices manipulation
3. Understand MATLAB functions and expressions
4. Apply flow control and files in MATLAB
5. Understand Plotting and Simulink blocks in MATLAB

UNIT I MATLAB BASICS 6 hours


Introduction, Matlab environment, Matlab as a calculator, Matlab Online, Syntax and Semantics,
Help, Data Types-Matrix, string, cell and structure, Variables and Arrays, Initializing Variables,
Multidimensional Arrays, Sub arrays, Special Values, Displaying Output Data, Data Files, Scalar and
Array Operations, Hierarchy of Operations, Built-in MATLAB Functions, Debugging MATLAB
Programs

 Swap the values in two variables without using temporary variable. For example, the variable
‘x’ contains the value ‘5’ and the variable ‘y’ contains the value ‘10’. The program should
swap the values in the variable’s ‘x’ and ‘y’. After the execution of the program the value in
the variable ‘x’ should be ‘10’ and the value in the variable ‘y’ should be ‘5’. This should be
accomplished without using the temporary variable.
 Write a function which should return either maximum or minimum value of the element in
an array.
 Write a code to find whether the given number is even or not.
 Write a function that should sort the elements in the array either in the ascending order or
descending order.
 Write a program which should count the number of occurrences of particular element in the
array.

UNIT II MATRICES AND OPERATORS 6 hours


Introduction, Colon Operator, Accessing Parts of a Matrix, Combining and Transforming Matrices,
Arithmetic operations
 Write a program to find the maximum and minimum value of the elements of the matrix
 Write a program to compute the sum of diagonal elements of the given matrix
 Write a program to test whether the given matrix is symmetric or not?
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 
0 1 0 0 1  j  1 j 
 Obtain the rank of the following matrices (i)  (ii)   and
0 0 1 0 1  1 1  1 
   
0 0 0 1 1 j  1  j 
comment on the result.
 Write a program to check whether the given matrix is invertible or not? {Hint: A matrix is
invertible if is not singular. The determinant of the matrix should not be equal to zero}
 Write a program to check the given matrix is orthogonal or not?
 Use the built-in function to compute the eigen value and the eigen vector of the given matrix.
From the eigen value is it possible to find whether the given matrix is (i) Positive definite (ii)
Positive semidefinite.

 Create a vector ‘x’ that should contain elements from 1 to 10. Write a code to perform the
following operation
(i) Add a constant (say 3) to each element of ‘x’.
(ii) Make all the even indexed elements to zero.
(iii) Make all the odd indexed elements to zero.
(iv) Generate ‘y’ which should contain elements in the reverse order of ‘x’.
(v) Generate ‘y’ such that it should have first five elements of ‘x’ and the remaining
elements to zero
(vi) Add the constant to odd indexed elements of ‘x’.
(vii) Add the constant to the even indexed elements of ‘x’
 Write a program to solve the linear algebraic equation
(i) 5x-3y+2z = 10
(ii) -3x+8y+4z = 20
(iii) 2x+4y-9z = 9
 Write a program to determine the eigen vector and eigen values of A = [ 1 2 3; 4 5 6; 7 8 9]

UNIT III FUNCTIONS AND EXPRESSIONS 6 hours


Introduction, Function I/O, Formal Definition of Functions, Sub functions, Scope, Advantages of
Functions, Scripts, and Problem-Solving File Input-Output, Expressions, write a function which
returns the “median” of the array of elements.
 Write a code to print the prime numbers from one to hundred.
 Write a function which accepts the radius of the circle as input and returns the area and
perimeter of the circle.
 Write a code which will compute sum of integers ranging from 1 to 100.
 Write a code to compute the “body mass index”. The input to the code should be (i) Weight
and (ii) Height of the person. The output of the program should be “body mass index (bmi)”
 Write a program to convert the temperature in degrees to Celsius.
 Write a program to check whether the given string (word) is palindrome or not?
 Write a program to compute the factorial of the given number.
 Find the roots of the polynomial
f ( x)  3 x 6  15 x 5  10 x 3  4 x
 An R-L-C circuit has R = 180 ohms, C = 1/280 farads, L = 20 Henries and an
applied voltage E(t) = 10 sin t. Assuming that no charge is present but an initial
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

current of I ampere is flowing at t = 0 when the voltage is first applied, find q


dq
and i  at any time t. q is given by the differential equation.
dt
d 2q dq q
L 2
 R   E (t )
dt dt c
 The function sin(x) can be written as a Taylor series by:

(1) k x 2 k 1
sin x   Write a user-defined function file that calculates sin(x) by using the Taylor
k  0 (2k  1)!
series.

UNIT IV FLOW CONTROL AND FILES 6 hours


For – Loops, While – Loops, Break Statements, Logical Indexing, Pre allocation. Data Types:
Introduction, Strings, Structs, Cells. Selection, If – Statements, Relational and Logical Operators,
Nested If – Statements, Variables Number of Function, Arguments, Robustness, Persistent Variables.
switch and case statement, while statement, break, Continue. Files- File Input/ Output: File I/O,
Excel Files, Text Files, Binary Files.
 Without using the max command, find the maximum value of matrix (a) where
a =[11 3 14;8 6 2;10 13 1]

 Let x=[2 6; 1 8], y=[.8 -0.3 ; -0.1 0.2], prove that y is not the inverse matrix of x
 The value of s could be calculated from the equation below:
s  y2  4x z if y  4 x z
 if y  4 x z
write a MATLAB program in M-File to do the following steps: -
a) input the value of x, y, z
b) calculate s
c) print the output as shown below
x=...
y=...
z=...
s=...
 Use a for-end loop in a script file to calculate the sum of the first n terms of the series:
n
(1)k k

k 1 2k
Execute the script file for n = 4 and n = 20.

 Write a program to find the current I in the circuit shown below


a) By using conditional statements.
b) Without using any conditional statements.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V PLOTTING AND SIMULINK 6 hours

Two – Dimensional Plots - Plot, fplot, Multiple Graphs, Formatting, Logarithmic Axes, Error Bars,
Special Graphics, Histograms, Polar Plots, Multiple Plots on The Same Page, Multiple Figure
Windows, Three-Dimensional Plots- Line Plots, Mesh and Surface Plots, Special Graphics, View
Command. Simulink: Getting Started, Simulink Library Browser, Basic Elements-Blocks, Lines,
building a System-Gathering Blocks, Modifying the Blocks, Connecting the Blocks, Running
Simulations, Specification, Toolboxes, Building Systems.

 The expression for sine wave is given by x(t )  A sin( 2ft   ) .Write a code which accepts
the input as (i) Amplitude (A) (ii) Frequency (f) and (iii) Phase(  ) and generates the sine
wave. Plot the sine wave.
 Write a program to convert the sine wave to (i) Half wave rectified sine wave and (ii) Full
wave rectified sine wave.
 Write a program which converts the sine wave to a square wave [Equivalent to that of “zero-
crossing detector” or “comparator” concept in “Linear Integrated Circuits”].
 Write a program to generate three-phase sinusoidal signal. [The student should know what is
the phase difference between three phases in a three-phase sinusoidal signal and the
importance of three phase power]
 Design a Simulink block for power electronic circuits

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to

1. Interpret the MATLAB commands and elementary functions


2. Solve mathematical operations and matrices manipulation
3. Apply MATLAB functions and expressions
4. Execute implementation of flow controls and files in MATLAB
5. Demonstrate Plotting and Simulink blocks in MATLAB.

Text Books:
1. Getting Started with MATLAB, Rudra Pratap Oxford University Press, 1st edition, 2019
2. MATLAB for Beginners: A Gentle Approach, Kattan, Peter Issa, Petra books, 2008

Reference Books:

1. MATLAB for Engineering Applications, William Palm, Mcgraw Hill,4th edition, 2019.
2. MATLAB for Engineers, Holly Moore, Pearson Education,5th edition,2018

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – III

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE604 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PCB) DESIGNING
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite 20ECE203

Course Description:
This course is intended to give students a basic understanding of PCB design. PCB design is an
important aspect of every electronic product, and this course is meant to prepare students to design
their own PCB projects to meet industrial standards.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study the fundamental steps involved in PCB design.
2. Understand the concept of designing single layer and multilayer PCB.
3. Study the different design considerations of PCB Fabrication.
4. Obtain knowledge of various EDA tools for PCB designing.
5. Study various standards in PCB testing.

UNIT I Introduction 6 hours

PCB definition, Evolution of PCBs, PCB materials, PCB design tools, PCB development process,
PCB soldering tools, soldering flux, soldering wires, and cleaning materials.
 Introduction to Printed circuit board: Fundamental of electronic components.
 Basics of printed circuit board designing: Layout planning, general rules and parameters,
ground conductor considerations, thermal issues, crosstalk, check and inspection of artwork

UNIT II Fundamentals of Printed Circuit Boards 6 hours


Components of PCB, Basic Electronic Circuits, Classification of PCBs, Manufacturing of PCBs,
Single sided, double sided, Multilayer, and Flexible Boards, Challenges in PCB design and
Manufacturing, Standards on PCB.
 Study on types of PCB layers, through Hole and SMD Components.
 Schematic Creation and simulation of an electronic circuit
 Mapping Components of an electronic circuit
 Set Parameters for PCB Design.

UNIT III Layout Design Considerations 6 hours


General PCB design Consideration, Mechanical Design Consideration, Electrical Design
Consideration, Conductor Patterns, Component Placement Rules, Fabrication and Assembly
Consideration, Environmental Factors, Cooling Requirements and Package Density.
 Create PCB Layout of a clamper circuit
 Create PCB Layout of a Full-wave Rectifier.
 Create PCB Layout of an ASTABLE MUTIVIBRATOR USING 555 IC
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT IV Electronic Design Automation Tools 6 hours


Introduction to Electronic design automation (EDA) tools for PCB designing: Brief Introduction of
various simulators, Selecting the Components Footprints as per design, Making New Footprints,
Assigning Footprint to components, Net listing, PCB Layout Designing, Auto-routing and manual
routing. Assigning specific text (silkscreen) to design, creating design report, and creating
manufacturing data (GERBER) for design.
 Create PCB Layout of Transistor Amplifier.
 Create PCB Layout of RC Phase Shift Oscillator Circuit
 Create PCB Layout of Summing Amplifier Using OPAMP
 Create PCB Layout of full adder using half-adders.

UNIT V Quality, Reliability, and Acceptability Aspect 6 hours


Quality assurance, Teasing for Quality Control, Quality Control Methods, Testing of Printed Circuit
Boards, Reliability Testing, Acceptability of PCBs, and Useful Standards.
 Create PCB Layout of J-K flip flop.
 Create PCB Layout of 4-BIT Binary Counter
 Create PCB Layout of variable DC power supply.
 Create PCB Layout of Temperature Sensing Circuit
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the fundamental process in PCB design.
2. Understand the design and manufacturing techniques of PCB.
3. Create and Fabricate PCB using EDA tools.
4. Comprehend the standards involved in PCB design.
5. Evaluate and test the PCB for the designed circuits.
Text Book(s)
1. Jon Varteresian, Fabricating Printed Circuit Boards, Newnes, 2002

2. Simon Monk, Make your own PCBs with Eagle: from schematic designs to finished boards,
McGraw-Hill Education Pvt Ltd., 2014.
Reference Books
1. RS Khandpur, Printed Circuit Board, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2006

2. C. Coombs, Printed Circuits Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional, 6 editions, 2007


Elaine Rhodes, Developing Printed Circuit Assemblies: From Specifications to Mass
3.
Production, 2008

4. S D Mehta, Electronic Product Design Volume-I, S Chand Publications, 2011

5. V. Shukla, Signal Integrity for PCB Designers, Reference Designer, 2009


Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – III

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE605 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE FOUNDATIONS
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite Nill

Course Description:
This laboratory course will drive the students into the fundamentals of AI, basic principles of data
structure and data visualization. Also develop a practical understanding of Python as an AI tool.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Train the students in solving computational problems
2. To elucidate solving mathematical problems using Python programming language
3. To understand the fundamentals of Python programming concepts and its applications.
4. Practical understanding of building different types of models and their evaluation

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 6 hours

Evolution and Definition of AI, Difference Between Narrow, General and Super AI, Applications of
AI across industries, Opportunities in AI, Principles of Machine Learning.
1. Study of Numpy and Pandas basic programs.
2. Write a program to implement Breadth First Search using Python.

UNIT II DATABASE CONCEPTS 6 hours


Introduction to Database Concepts, Foundations of Databases, Implementations of Database
Structures
1. Write a program to implement Depth First Search using Python
2. Write a program to implement Tic-Tac-Toe game using Python.

UNIT III AI PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS: PYTHON 6 hours


Introduction to AI Programming with Python, Basic Python Programming for AI, Algorithms, Sorting
Algorithms, Searching Algorithms, Geometric and Graphing Algorithms.
1. Write a program to implement 8-Puzzle problem using Python.
2. Write a program to implement Water-Jug problem using Python
3. Write a program to implement Travelling Salesman Problem using Python

UNIT IV AI STATISTICS: PYTHON 6 hours


Basic Statistic Concepts, Descriptive Statistics.
1. Write a program to implement Tower of Hanoi using Python.
2. Write a program to implement Monkey Banana Problem using Python.

UNIT V DATA VISUALIZATION WITH PYTHON 6 hours


Fundamentals of Data Visualizations, Types of Visualization Tools: Basic and Specialized, Graph
Types.
1. Write a program to implement Missionaries-Cannibals Problems using Python.
2. Write a program to implement 8-Queens Problem using Python
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Formulate a problem and build intelligent agents
2. Apply appropriate searching techniques to solve a real world problem
3. Evaluation of different uninformed search algorithms on well formulate problems along with
stating valid conclusions that the evaluation supports
Text Book(s)
1. Kevin Knight, Elaine Rich, B. Nair, Artificial Intelligence, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig. Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach, Pearson

Reference Books
1. George F. Luger, “AI-Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”, 4/e, 2002,
Pearson Education.
2. Dan W. Patterson, Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert System, PHI.

3. Nils J. Nilsson, Artificial Intelligence: A New Synthesis, Morgan Kauffman, 2002.David E


Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Pearson
Education, 2013.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – III

B. Tech III Year I Semester


20ECE606 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C++
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite Nill

Course Description:
This lab course provides in-depth coverage of object-oriented programming principles and techniques
using C++. Topics include classes, overloading, data abstraction, information hiding, encapsulation,
inheritance, polymorphism, file processing, templates, exceptions, container classes, and low-level
language features.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Provide basic characteristics of OOP through C++.
2. Introduce the concepts of class, method, constructor, instance, overriding, overloading
3. Impart skills on various kinds of overloading and inheritance.
4. Introduce the principles of virtual functions and polymorphism
5. Introduce pointers and file handling in C++ together with exception handling mechanism

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF C++ 6 hours

Getting started with C++ syntax, data-type, variables, expressions, operators, statements, arrays,
strings, pointers and functions. Introduction to object-oriented programming, user defined types,
structures, unions, polymorphism, and encapsulation.

1. Create a class named 'Student' with a string variable 'name' and an integer variable 'roll_no'.
Assign the value of roll_no as '2' and that of name as "John" by creating an object of the class
Student.
2. Write a class having two private variables and one member function which will return the
area of the rectangle.
3. Perform addition operation on complex data using class and object. The program should ask
for real and imaginary part of two complex numbers, and display the real and imaginary parts
of their sum.
4. Write a program that ask for two numbers, compare them and show the maximum. Declare a
function called max_two that compares the numbers and returns the maximum.

UNIT II CLASSES AND DATA ABSTRACTION 6 hours


Introduction, classes, Friend functions, Friend classes, Inline functions, Constructors, Arrays of
objects, This pointers, Pointers to class members, Reference parameters, Dynamic allocation
operators, Function overloading, Copy constructors, Operator overloading.

1. Using function overloading write C++program to find the volume of cube, cylinder, cone and
sphere.
2. Write a C++ program illustrating an interactive program for swapping integer, real, and
character type variables without using function overloading. Write the same program by using
function overloading features and compare the same with its C counterpart.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

3. Write a C++ program to perform different arithmetic operation such as addition, subtraction,
division, modulus and multiplication using inline function.

UNIT III INHERITANCE, VIRTUAL FUNCTION & POLYMORPHISM 6 hours


Concept of inheritance. Derived class and based class. Derived class constructors, Member function,
Class hierarchies, public and private inheritance, aggregation: Classes within classes, inheritance and
program development, static and dynamic binding, Virtual functions, Dynamic binding through
virtual functions, Virtual function call mechanism, Pure virtual functions, Abstract classes,
Implications of polymorphic use of classes, Virtual destructors.
1. Write a program to swap private data members of classes named class_1, class_2 using friend
function.
2. Using operator overloading write a C++ program for class STRING and overload the operator
+ and == to concatenate two strings length.
3. Write a C++ program illustrating Constructor overloading (Both parameterized and default).

UNIT IV FILE STREAMS 6 hours


C++ I/O: I/O using C functions, Stream classes hierarchy, Stream I/O, File streams and String
streams, Error handling during file operations.
1. Write a C++ program to read and print employee details using Files.
2. Write a C++ program to copy the contents of one text file to another file.
3. Write a C++ program that uses function template to determine the square of an integer, a
float and a double
4. Write a Template Based Program to Sort the Given List of Element

UNIT V GENERIC PROGRAMMING AND EXCEPTIONS 6 hours


Function templates, Overloading template functions, Class templates, Exception handling techniques.
1. Write a Program Containing a Possible Exception. Use a Try Block to Throw it and a Catch
Block to Handle it Properly.
2. Write a Program to Demonstrate the Catching of All Exceptions
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the features of C++ supporting object-oriented programming
2. Apply the concepts of class, method, constructor, instance, overriding, overloading
3. Choose suitable inheritance while proposing solution for the given problem.
4. Apply virtual and pure virtual function & complex programming situations
5. Implement Object Oriented Programs using templates and file handling concepts.

Text Book(s)
1. The Complete Reference C++, 4th Edition, Herbert Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill

Reference Books
1. The C++ Programming Language, 3rd Edition, B. Stroutstrup, Pearson Education

2. Object Oriented Programming in C++, 3rd Edition, R. Lafore, Galigotia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – IV

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE607 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (RTOS)
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite 20ECE107

Course Description:
This laboratory course emphasizes to the students to understand the concepts of real time operating
systems (RTOS). This course covers the different types of policies, multi-resource services and give
embedded system components. It also covers the High availability and Reliability Design.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the introduction of real-time embedded systems
2. Know the different types of policies.
3. Understand the Multi-Resource Services techniques.
4. Learn the Embedded System Components.
5. Know the embedded system design based on availability and reliability.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO REAL-TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 6 hours

Brief history of Real Time Systems, A brief history of Embedded Systems. Resource Analysis, Real-
Time Service Utility. Uniprocessor Scheduling: Types of scheduling algorithms: FCFS, SJF, Priority,
Round Robin UNIX Multi-level feedback queue scheduling, Thread Scheduling, Multiprocessor
Scheduling concept.

 Write the pseudo code in Linux using C/C++ to perform FCFS scheduling
 Write the pseudo code in Linux using C/C++ to perform Round Robin scheduling

UNIT II RTOS POLICIES AND PROCESS MANAGEMENT 6 hours


Pre-emptive Fixed-Priority Policy, Feasibility, Rate Monotonic least upper bound, Necessary and
Sufficient feasibility, Deadline – Monotonic Policy, Dynamic priority policies. I/O Resources: Worst-
case Execution time, Intermediate I/O, Execution efficiency.
PROCESS MANAGEMENT: Concepts, scheduling, IPC, RPC, CPU Scheduling, scheduling criteria,
scheduling algorithms Threads: Multi-threading models, threading issues, thread libraries,
synchronization Mutex: creating, deleting, prioritizing mutex, mutex internals
 Write an application that creates two tasks of the same priority and sets the time slice period
to illustrate time slicing.
 Write an application that Demonstrates the interruptible ISRs (Requires timer to have higher
priority than external interrupt button

UNIT III MULTI-RESOURCE SERVICES& INTER-PROCESS 6 hours


COMMUNICATION
Blocking, Deadlock and livestock, Critical sections to protect shared resources, priority inversion. Soft
Real-Time Services: Missed Deadlines, QoS, Alternatives to rate monotonic policy, mixed hard and
soft real-time services. Messages, Buffers, mailboxes, queues, semaphores
 Study of Semaphore & Write appropriate the pseudo code in Linux using C/C++
 Write an application to Test message queues and memory blocks
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT IV EXCEPTIONS, INTERRUPTS AND TIMERS 6 hours


Exceptions, Interrupts, Applications, Processing of Exceptions and Spurious Interrupts, Real Time
Clocks, Programmable Timers, Timer Interrupt Service Routines (ISR), Soft Timers, Operations.
 Write an application that creates a task which is scheduled when a button is pressed, which
illustrates the use of an event set between an ISR and a task
 Write an application that creates a two task to Blinking two different LEDs at different
timings.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 6 hours


Case study Linux POSIX system, RTLinux / RTAI, Windows system, Vxworks, uItron Kernel Design
Issues: structure, process states, data structures, inter-task communication mechanism, Linux
Scheduling
 Developing image processing application with Linux OS on Xilinx FPGA
 Porting Linux and developing simple application on Xilinx Zed board
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Introduce real-time embedded systems
2. Describe the different types of policies.
3. Demonstrate the Multi-Resource Services techniques.
4. Explain the Embedded System Components.
5. Explain the embedded system design based on availability and reliability.
Text Book(s)
1. C.M. Krishna and G.Shin, Real Time Systems, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2017.

2. Jean J Labrosse, Embedded Systems Building Blocks Complete and Ready-to-use Modules in
C, CMP books, 2/e, 1999. (reprint 2011)
Reference Books
1. Jean J Labrosse, Micro C/OS-II, The Real Time Kernel, CMP Books, 2011.

2. Sam Siewert, V, Real-Time Embedded Components and Systems: With Linux and RTOS
(Engineering), 2015.
3. Rajkamal, “Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming, and Design”, 2007, TMH.

4. Real-Time Systems: Scheduling, Analysis, and Verification – Albert M. K. Cheng, Wiley.

5. David E. Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Volume1.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Skill Oriented Course – IV

B. Tech III Year II Semester


20ECE608 INTERNET OF THINGS
L T P C
1 0 2 2
Pre-requisite 20ECE404

Course Description:
This laboratory course is a network of a wide variety of thing such as moisture, temperature, motion
detection and many more. The thing can be measured with the sensors and process through
microcontroller devices. These devices also use the data processing units and gateways to process the
data to control the other ends. This course is an introduction to the embedded devices, communication
protocols and APIs used in IoT.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Introduce the basic understanding IoT system
2. Expose the student to a variety of embedded system and interfaces
3. Create a basic understanding of the communication protocols in IoT communications.
4. Familiarize the student with networking and application program interfaces for IoT.
5. Enable students to create various use cases of IoT.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT) 6 hours


Introduction, Concept and History: IOT History, IoT Applications, Requirements of IoT,
Understanding IoT fundamentals, IOT Architecture and IOT challenges. Major functional
components of IoT, IoT enabling technologies IoT, Standards IoT Entities, Overview of Sensors,
Categorization of sensors and their working, Actuators, Gateways, Cloud and Web of technology.

Lab practices: -
1. Study on IoT Platform a) Getting information and study of IOT microcontrollers (Arduino,
Raspberry-pi)
2. Study on IoT Platform a) Getting information about Sensors (IR, temperature, pressure, gas sensor)
b) Getting information about actuators. (Piezoelectric actuator, pneumatic actuator)

UNIT II EMBEDDED SYSTEM (ARDUINO AND RASPBERRY PI) 6 hours


AND PERIPHERAL INTERFACES
Embedded Computing Basics; Microcontrollers; System-on-Chips. ARM Architecture, Arduino
Board development platform and Raspberry PI development platform.
IoT with Arduino General Purpose I/O(GPIO) Serial Communication Interfaces: RS-232/485
Synchronous Peripheral Interfaces: I2C, SPI Sensors interfacing with Raspberry PI , IoT Real Time
Operating Systems, General Purpose I/O(GPIO) Serial Communication Interfaces: RS-232/485
Synchronous Peripheral Interfaces, I2C,SPI Sensors Interfacing with Raspberry Pi, Introduction of
Arduino Python programming for IOT.

Lab practices: -
1.Programming with Arduino platform a) Installation of Arduino in computer and verifying any errors
in connection. b) Control LED using Arduino c) Traffic Light Control
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

2.Programming with Arduino platform and Reading from Sensors a) interfacing sensors to Arduino
board and getting information from them (any two sensors). b) Experiment with both analog and
digital sensors.
3.Programming with Resperrypi a) Displaying Date on Serial Monitor b) Automated Door Opening
System

UNIT III COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR IOT 6 hours


Wireless Sensor Networks & Protocols, Machine to Machine Communication, Wired Communication
Protocols. Ethernet Serial Communications, Wireless Communication protocols: Wifi, RF, IPV4/V6,
6LOWPAN, ZigBee (IEEE802.15.4) BLE, GSM(2G/3G/LTE),NFC, RF Comm and z wave and MAC
Addresses, Application of MQTT/MQTT-SN, HTTP REST, XMPP and AMQP.

Lab practices
1.Connecting Android Phone with Arduino:
a) Connecting Arduino with Mobile Device Using the Bluetooth Module.
b) Control any two actuators connected to the development board using
2. Integrating Ethernet Shield. Read data from sensor and send it to a requesting client using socket
communication. Note: The client and server should be connected to same local area network.
3. Creating Mobile App a) Create a mobile app to control an actuator. b) Control Electronic Devices
from anywhere across the world using Internet & Mobile App.

UNIT IV NETWORKING FOR IOT 6 hours


Network Layer Model (OSI or TCP/IP), Network Topologies, Clouding computing, fog computing
and big data technology, data handling and analytics, Introduction of Software define networking,
Introduction of API and how to define new API.
Lab practices
1. Interfacing Cloud a) Push sensor data to cloud - Use Arduino to Upload data from
Environmental Sensors to Cloud Server. b) Control an actuator through cloud
2. Data analysis and Visualization Access the data pushed from sensor to cloud and apply any
data analytics or visualization services.
social media with IoT Creating Program for Local host Web Server for controlling devices and update
status on Twitter through Arduino.

UNIT V USE CASES OF IOT 6 hours


Case study of IOT applications
Introduction, models, technology used: Industrial internet of things, connected vehicles, Agriculture
and IOT. Heath care and IOT, Smart grid system, Smart cities IoT Wearables, Health care systems
and Allied sectors.
Lab practices
1. Mini Project Identify a problem in your local area or college which can be solved by integrating
the things you learned so far and create a prototype to solve it.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Interpret the design principles that govern connected devices and select a platform for a
particular embedded computing application
2. Develop simple applications using Arduino microcontroller
3. Develop simple applications using Raspberry Pi
4. Utilize the Internet communication protocols for IoT applications
5. Design and develop a solution for a given application with cloud and TCP/IP Model.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Book(s)
1. Hanes, David, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Robert Barton, and Jerome Henry. IoT
fundamentals: Networking technologies, protocols, and use cases for the internet of things. Cisco
Press, 2017.
2. Bahga, Arshdeep, and Vijay Madisetti. Internet of Things: A hands-on approach. Vpt, 2014.

Reference Books
1. NPTEL Course on: Introduction of Internet of Things. By Prof. Sudip Misra | IIT Kharagpur

2. Raj, Pethuru, and Anupama C. Raman. The Internet of Things: Enabling technologies, platforms,
and use cases. Auerbach Publications, 2017.
3. Richardson, Matt, and Shawn Wallace. Getting started with raspberry PI. " O'Reilly Media, Inc.",
2012.
Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor in Electronics & Communication Engineering


Stream Name: Communication Systems (CS)
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE101 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING: BASIC PRINCIPLES AND
APPLICATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course explores semiconductor physics, and operation & applications of semiconductor devices
such as p-n junctions, BJTs, and MOSFETs. It also covers operational amplifiers and applications of
operational amplifiers.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the operation of the basic semiconductor diodes, i.e., the p-n junction diode and
Zener diodes.
2. Understand the operation of BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs.
3. Know the applications of p-n junctions, BJTs and MOSFETs.
4. Understand the Principle of operation differential amplifier.
5. Know the applications of operation differential amplifier.

UNIT I P-N JUNCTION DIODE 9 hours


P-N junction: Formation, operation, I-V characteristics, small signal switching models, and avalanche
breakdown of p-n junctions. Operation and I-V characteristics of Zener diodes. Tunnel diodes,
Varactor diodes, Metal-semiconductor junctions.

UNIT II TRANSISTORS 9 hours


BJTs: Structure, operation, and I-V characteristics of BJTs. Early effect in BJTs.
JFET: Structure, operation, and I-V characteristics of JFETs.
MOSFET: Structure, operation, and I-V characteristics of MOSFETs. Channel length modulation in
MOSFETs.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF DIODES AND TRANSISTORS 9 hours


P-N junction: Formation, operation, I-V characteristics, small signal switching models, and avalanche
breakdown junctions: Half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers. Clipping and clamping circuits.
Voltage regulator circuit using Zener diodes.
BJTs: BJT as an amplifier and a switch. Biasing in BJT amplifier circuits.
MOSFETs: MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch. Biasing in MOSFET amplifier circuits.

UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9 hours


Principle of operation differential amplifier, calculation of differential gain, common mode gain and
CMRR – DC and AC characteristics, Inverting – Non-inverting amplifier – Summing and difference
amplifiers, Integrators and Differentiators circuits.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER 9 hours


Nonlinear Op-amp circuits: Log and antilog Amplifiers, Analog switch - Sample and Hold circuit
Analog multipliers, Precision rectifiers, - Comparators and Schmitt Trigger - Active filters.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Acquire basic knowledge on the operation of semiconductor devices like p-n junctions, Zener
diodes.
2. Compare the operation of BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs
3. Design various circuits using p-n junctions, Zener diodes, BJTs and MOSFETs.
4. Understand the Principle of operation differential amplifier.
5. Obtain the applications of operation differential amplifier.

Text Book(s)
1. D. Neamen and D. Biswas, "Semiconductor Physics and Devices," McGraw-Hill Education.

2. B.G. Streetman and S. K. Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition, Pearson, 2016.

Reference Books
1. S. M. Sze and K. K. Ng, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices,” 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2007.
2. A. S. Sedra and K. C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and Applications”, 6th edition,
Oxford Press, 2013.
3. J. Millman and A. Grabel, “Microelectronics”, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill.

4. Paul Scherz and Simon monk “Practical electronics for inventors” 4th edition, McGraw-Hill
Education, 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE102 COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course describes develop an understanding of modern network architectures from a design and
performance perspective. The course also introduces concepts of working of the internet by
introducing layered architectures of OSI and TCP/IP.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To develop an understanding of modern network architectures.
2. To acquire knowledge and understanding on data flow, error control, MAC layer.
3. To understand the basics of masking in Network layer required for CCN.
4. To acquire the knowledge involved protocols related to Transport Layer.
5. To understand the requirement of distinct client-server model, DNS, FTP, HTTP, cryptography
etc to be applicable in large CCN.

UNIT I DATA COMMUNICATION COMPONENTS 9 hours


Representation of data and its flow Networks, Various Connection Topology, Protocols and
Standards, OSI model, Transmission Media, LAN: Wired LAN, Wireless LANs, Connecting LAN
and Virtual LAN, Techniques for Bandwidth utilization: Multiplexing - Frequency division, Time
division and Wave division, Concepts on spread spectrum.

UNIT II DATA LINK LAYER AND MEDIUM ACCESS LAYER 9 hours


Error Detection and Error Correction - Fundamentals, Block coding, Hamming Distance, CRC; Flow
Control and Error control protocols - Stop and Wait, go back – N ARQ, Selective Repeat ARQ, Sliding
Window, Piggybacking, Random Access, Multiple access protocols -Pure ALOHA, Slotted ALOHA,
CSMA/CD, CDMA/CA.

UNIT III NETWORK LAYER 9 hours


Network Layer: Switching, Logical addressing – IPV4, IPV6; Address mapping – ARP, RARP,
BOOTP and DHCP–Delivery, Forwarding and Unicast Routing protocols.

UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9 hours


Process to Process Communication, User Datagram Protocol (UDP), Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP), SCTP Congestion Control; Quality of Service, QoS improving techniques: Leaky Bucket and
Token Bucket algorithm.

UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9 hours


Client Server Model, Domain Name Space (DNS), DDNS, TELNET, EMAIL, File Transfer
Protocol (FTP), WWW, HTTP, SNMP, Bluetooth, Firewalls, Cryptography.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Interpret the design principles that govern connected devices and select a platform for a
particular embedded computing application
2. Develop simple applications using Arduino microcontroller
3. Develop simple applications using Raspberry Pi
4. Utilize the Internet communication protocols for IoT applications
5. Design and develop a solution for a given application with cloud and TCP/IP Model.

Text Book(s)
1. Data Communication and Networking, 4th Edition, Behrouz A. Forouzan, McGrawHill.

2. Data and Computer Communication, 8th Edition, William Stallings, Pearson Prentice Hall
India.
Reference Books
1. Computer Networks, 8th Edition, Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Pearson New International Edition.

2. Internetworking with TCP/IP, Volume 1, 6th Edition Douglas Comer, Prentice Hall of India.

3. TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, W. Richard Stevens, Addison-Wesley, United States of America.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE103 ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course is to provide a basic introduction to analog digital communications. Topics include
understanding of analog continuous wave modulation and evaluate the performance of these systems
in the presence of noise; study of various analog and digital pulse modulation schemes; principle of
digital baseband and pass band communication systems, channel coding and equalization techniques
to improve the system performance.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To study the fundamental concepts of communication theory.
2. To analyze various analog continuous wave modulation and pulse modulation techniques.
3. To evaluate the performance of analog communication systems in the presence of noise.
4. To study different baseband and bandpass digital modulation techniques.
5. To study the performance of digital receivers.

UNIT I NOISES ANALYSIS 9 hours


Review of probability and random process. Gaussian and white noise characteristics, Noise in
amplitude modulation systems, Noise in Frequency modulation systems. Pre-emphasis and De-
emphasis, Threshold effect in angle modulation.

UNIT II ANALOG MODULATION 9 hours


Review of signals and systems, Frequency domain representation of signals, Principles of Amplitude
Modulation Systems- DSB, SSB and VSB modulations. Frequency Division Multiplexing. Angle
Modulation, Representation of FM and PM signals, Spectral characteristics of angle modulated
signals.

UNIT III DIGITAL KEYING TECHNIQUES 9 hours


Pulse modulation, Sampling process. PAM, PPM, PWM and Pulse code modulation (PCM), Noise
considerations in PCM, Time Division multiplexing, Digital Multiplexers. Differential pulse code
modulation and Adaptive PCM. Delta modulation.

UNIT IV SHIFT KEYING TECHNIQUES 9 hours


Baseband Pulse Transmission- Matched Filter – Error rate- Inter-Symbol Interference and Nyquist
criterion. Pass band Digital Modulation Schemes-Passband Transmission Model- Phase Shift Keying,
Frequency Shift Keying, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, Minimum Shift Keying.

UNIT V SIGNALS CONDITIONING 9 hours


Linear Block Codes- Convolutional codes- Linear equalization and Decision Feedback techniques for
band-limited channels- Adaptive Equalization- Synchronization and Carrier Recovery for Digital
modulation.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Analyze the analog continuous wave modulation techniques in time and frequency domain.
2. Evaluate the performance of continuous wave modulation systems in the presence of noise.
3. Study of various analog and digital pulsed modulation techniques.
4. Understand of various digital baseband and bandpass modulation techniques.
5. Study of improvement in the performance of digital communication system using channel coding
and equalization technique.

Text Book(s)
1. Simon Haykin and Michale Moher, “An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communications”,
2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
2. B. P. Lathi and Zhi Ding, “Modern Analog and Digital Communication Systems”, 4th Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2010.
3. Simon Haykin and Michale Moher, “Communication Systems”, 4th Edition, John Wiley and
Sons, 2004.
Reference Books
1. H. P. Hsu, “Theory and Problems of Analog and Digital Communications”, 3rd Edition,
Schaum’s Outline, 2009.
2. Proakis J. G. and Salehi M., “Communication Systems Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Taub H. and Schilling D.L., “Principles of Communication Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

4. Wozencraft J. M. and Jacobs I. M., “Principles of Communication Engineering”, John Wiley,


1965.
5. Barry J. R., Lee E. A. and Messerschmitt D. G., “Digital Communication”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2004.
6. Proakis J.G., “Digital Communications”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE104 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course gives an introduction to Satellite Communication Systems which combines diverse topics
like radio-wave propagation, antennas, modulation, demodulation, coding, orbital mechanics etc. The
spacecraft link analysis and link design will be dealt in detail. The various satellite access techniques
like FDMA, TDMA and CDMA will be analyzed from bandwidth utilization and throughput
capability. The Indian National Satellite System (INSAT) will be covered in detail giving its
specifications, features and services provided. The INTELSAT and other programs will also be
covered. The VSAT, Mobile satellite communication and Personal Satellite communication will be
discussed. The principles of Global Positioning System (GPS) principles, GPS receivers and its
applications would be covered. The regulatory and interference issues will also be covered.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To make the students understand the basic concept in the field of Satellite Communication and to
know how to place a satellite in an orbit.
2. To calculate the link power budget.
3. To get a complete knowledge about the earth and space subsystems
4. To gain knowledge about the Satellite Access schemes
5. To gain knowledge about the Satellite system and mobile services provided

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SATELLITE SUBSYSTEMS 9 hours


Historical background, Overview of satellite communications, Orbital Mechanics, Useful orbits for satellite
communications, look angle determination, orbital perturbations, orbit determination, launches and launch
vehicles, orbital effects in communication systems performance. Satellite Subsystems: Attitude and orbital
control system, Telemetry, Tracking, command and monitoring, power systems, communication subsystems,
satellite antenna equipment reliability and space qualification.

UNIT II MODULATION, MULTIPLEXING, MULTIPLE ACCESS 9 hours


TECHNIQUES AND TRANSMISSION THEORY
Frequency Modulation (FM), Analog FM transmission by satellite, Digital Transmission, Digital Modulation
and Demodulation, Bit and symbol error rates BPSK, QPSK, Digital transmission of analog signals, Time
division Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) Time Division multiple access
(TDMA) frame structure, examples. Satellite switched TDMA onboard processing, DAMA, code division
multiple access (CDMA), spread spectrum transmission and reception. Basic transmission theory, EIRP, system
noise temperature and G/T ratio, design of down links, uplink design.

UNIT III EARTH STATIONS AND RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION 9 hours


EFFECTS
Earth Stations: Introduction, transmitters, receivers, Antenna and feed systems, tracking systems, network
interface subsystem, monitoring and auxillary equipment. Radio wave propagation effects & Impact on Satellite
Links: Quantifying attenuation and depolarization, Atmospheric absorption, Cloud attenuation, Rain and ice
effects, Prediction of rain attenuation, prediction of XPD, Propagation of Impairment countermeasures.

UNIT IV COMMERCIAL SATELLITE SYSTEMS AND VAST SYSTEMS 9 hours


INSAT, INTELSAT and EUTELSAT programmes: Services and salient features VSAT Systems: Overview,
Network Architecture, access control protocols, basic techniques, VSAT earth station engineering, calculation
of Link margins for VSAT star network, System design procedure example, new developments.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

UNIT V MOBILE SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS, NON- 9 hours


GEOSTATIONARY SATELLITE ORBIT (NGSO) SYSTEMS AND
GPS
Mobile Satellite Communications and Non-Geostationary Satellite Orbit (NGSO) Systems: The third
generation satellite communication, the need for mobile and personal communication, NGSO considerations,
coverage and frequency considerations, delay and throughput considerations, system considerations,
operational NGSO constellation designs. Satellite Navigation and The Global Positioning System
(GPS):Radio and satellite navigation, GPS position location principles, GPS receivers and codes, satellite
signal acquisition, GPS navigation message, GPS signal levels, GPS receiver operation, GPS C/A code
accuracy, differential GPS.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Explain the principles, concepts and operation of satellite communication systems.
2. Describe the concepts of signal propagation affects, link design, rain fading and link availability and
perform interference calculations.
3. Understand modulation techniques and error correction codes for satellite communication.
4. Use software tools to simulate and analyze the performance of satellite communication systems and use
real satellite up/down links (subject to the availability of satellite links) to conduct link experiments.
5. Critically analyze the design requirements and the performance of satellite communication systems,
including the GPS systems.

Text Book(s)
1. T. Pratt, C. W. Bostian and J. E. Allnutt, “Satellite Communications,” Wiley India, 2nd ed., 2006.

2. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite” Forth edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, Special Indian edition, 2009.

Reference Books
1. Global Navigation satellite systems - B. S. Rao (TMH).

2. G. Maral and M. Bousquet, “Satellite Communications Systems—Systems, Techniques and


Technology” John Wiley & Sons, 5thedition, 2009.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE105 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course provides details about light propagation in fibers, attenuation and dispersion in fibers, generation
of light chirp and hopping signals, design of optical receiver, design of fiber amplifier and design of time
division and wave length division systems.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Enumerate the theoretical aspects of light transmission in optical fiber.
2. Understand optical sources, detectors and amplifiers.
3. Understand TDM and WDM systems.
4. Study the characteristics of optical fiber, sources and detectors.
5. Estimate optical link budget consisting of optical sources, fibers and detectors.

UNIT I OPTICAL FIBERS 9 hours


Ray Theory transmission. Optical Confinement, cutoff condition, single mode/multimode concept. Losses and
Dispersion in optical fibers: Attenuation, Material Absorption Losses in Silica Glass Fibers, Linear Scattering
Losses, Fiber Bend Loss, Non Linear effects in optical fibers-SRS, SPM, SBS, FWM Dispersion, Chromatic
dispersion, Intermodal dispersion, Overall fiber dispersion, Polarization. Chirped Gaussian pulses, Broadening
of chirped Gaussian pulses, controlling the dispersion profile.

UNIT II OPTICAL SOURCES 9 hours


Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs): LED Structures, Light Source Materials, Quantum efficiency and LED Power,
Modulation of LED. LASER Diodes- Laser Diode Modes, laser action, mode selection and Threshold
Conditions, Some Injection laser structures-Gain guided lasers, index guided lasers, quantum well lasers,
quantum dot lasers, Single frequency injection lasers-Short and coupled cavity lasers, distributed feedback
lasers, vertical cavity surface emitting lasers, Injection laser characteristics, Threshold current dependence,
Dynamic response, Frequency Chirp, noise, mode hopping, Reliability.

UNIT III PHOTO DETECTORS 9 hours


Physical principles of photo diodes, photo detector noise, detector response time, avalanche multiplication
noise, structures for InGaAs APDs, temperature effect on avalanche gain, Receiver design, S/N estimation,
Digital optical receivers, Digital receiver sensitivity, comparisons of photo detectors. Design issues, S/N and
BER optimization, Practical receiver.

UNIT IV OPTICAL AMPLIFIERS 9 hours


Optical amplifiers-Semi-conductor optical amplifiers-performance characteristics, gain clamping, quantum
dots, Fiber and waveguide amplifiers- Rare earth fiber amplifiers, Raman and Brillouin amplifiers, Wave guide
amplifiers and fiber amplifiers, optical parametric amplifiers, wideband fiber amplifiers, Semi-conductor laser
amplifiers- SLA, Design and applications of amplifiers.

UNIT V MULTIPLEXING CONCEPTS AND OPTICAL SYSTEMS 9 hours


WDM Concepts and components: Over-view, Passive optical couplers, Isolators & circulators, Fiber grating
filters, dielectric thin film filters, and Phased array based devices, Diffraction gratings, Active optical
components, tunable light sources. Time Division Multiplexing- Optical TDM techniques, Soliton
communication- Solition generation, solution interaction, High capacity solution systems and jitter eduction,
WDM solution system- Solition Multiplexing techniques, new trends in optical communication. Optical
Systems: Point to point links, power penalties, and error control. Power penalty considerations and link budget
analysis. Different topologies used in optical networks, optical LAN, WANS, SONET/SDH, WDM light wave
system- Channel spacing decision, multipliers, design issues.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the structures of Optical fibers and its types.
2. Estimate attenuation and dispersion in optical fiber.
3. Describe various optical sources and detectors for communication applications.
4. Analyze the characteristics of optical fiber, sources and detectors, design as well as conduct
experiments in software and hardware, analyze the results to provide valid conclusion.
5. Evaluate optical link budget consisting of optical sources, fibers and detectors.

Text Book(s)
1. Govind P Agrawal, Fiber -optic Communication systems, Willey Publication 4th Edition, 2010.

2. Gerdkeiser, Optical fiber communications, McGraw Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2013.

3. John M. Senior, Optical fiber communications, PHI, 4rd Edition, 2010.

Reference Books
1. Max Ming-Kang Liu, Principles and Applications of Optical Communications, TMH, 2010.

2. S. C. Gupta, Text book on optical fiber communication and its applications PHI, 3rd Edition 2005.

3. Satish Kumar, Fundamentals of Optical Fiber communications, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2014.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE201 ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
Pre-requisite None

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To learn the basics of communication systems.
2. Have hands on the various analog and digital modulation systems.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Amplitude Modulation and demodulation.

2. DSB-SC modulation and demodulation.

3. SSB-SC modulation and demodulation.

4. Frequency Modulation and demodulation.

5. Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis.

6. Phase modulation and demodulation.

7. Study and simulation of signals in the presence of noise.

8. Sampling and Reconstruction.

9. Pulse Amplitude Modulation and Time Division Multiplexing.

10. Pulse Code Modulation & demodulation and Differential PCM modulation & demodulation.

11. Quadrature Phase Shift Keying and Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.

12. Line Coding, Performance of Unipolar and Bipolar systems.

13. FSK, PSK and DPSK schemes.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the fundamental concepts of communication systems.
2. To analyse various analog and pulse modulation schemes.
3. To study the performance of communication systems in the presence of noise.
4. To analyse different digital modulation schemes & identify their application.
5. Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation, Practical Examination.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor in Electronics & Communication Engineering


Stream Name: Embedded Systems (ES)
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE101 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING: BASIC PRINCIPLES AND
APPLICATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course explores semiconductor physics, and operation & applications of semiconductor devices
such as p-n junctions, BJTs, and MOSFETs. It also covers operational amplifiers and applications of
operational amplifiers.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the operation of the basic semiconductor diodes, i.e., the p-n junction diode and
Zener diodes.
2. Understand the operation of BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs.
3. Know the applications of p-n junctions, BJTs and MOSFETs.
4. Understand the Principle of operation differential amplifier.
5. Know the applications of operation differential amplifier.

UNIT I P-N JUNCTION DIODE 9 hours


P-N junction: Formation, operation, I-V characteristics, small signal switching models, and avalanche
breakdown of p-n junctions. Operation and I-V characteristics of Zener diodes. Tunnel diodes,
Varactor diodes, Metal-semiconductor junctions.

UNIT II TRANSISTORS 9 hours


BJTs: Structure, operation, and I-V characteristics of BJTs. Early effect in BJTs.
JFET: Structure, operation, and I-V characteristics of JFETs.
MOSFET: Structure, operation, and I-V characteristics of MOSFETs. Channel length modulation in
MOSFETs.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF DIODES AND TRANSISTORS 9 hours


P-N junction: Formation, operation, I-V characteristics, small signal switching models, and avalanche
breakdown junctions: Half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers. Clipping and clamping circuits.
Voltage regulator circuit using Zener diodes.
BJTs: BJT as an amplifier and a switch. Biasing in BJT amplifier circuits.
MOSFETs: MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch. Biasing in MOSFET amplifier circuits.

UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9 hours


Principle of operation differential amplifier, calculation of differential gain, common mode gain and
CMRR – DC and AC characteristics, Inverting – Non-inverting amplifier – Summing and difference
amplifiers, Integrators and Differentiators circuits.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER 9 hours


Nonlinear Op-amp circuits: Log and antilog Amplifiers, Analog switch - Sample and Hold circuit
Analog multipliers, Precision rectifiers, - Comparators and Schmitt Trigger - Active filters.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Acquire basic knowledge on the operation of semiconductor devices like p-n junctions, Zener
diodes.
2. Compare the operation of BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs
3. Design various circuits using p-n junctions, Zener diodes, BJTs and MOSFETs.
4. Understand the Principle of operation differential amplifier.
5. Obtain the applications of operation differential amplifier.

Text Book(s)
1. D. Neamen and D. Biswas, "Semiconductor Physics and Devices," McGraw-Hill Education.

2. B.G. Streetman and S. K. Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition, Pearson, 2016.

Reference Books
1. S. M. Sze and K. K. Ng, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices,” 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2007.
2. A. S. Sedra and K. C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and Applications”, 6th edition,
Oxford Press, 2013.
3. J. Millman and A. Grabel, “Microelectronics”, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill.

4. Paul Scherz and Simon monk “Practical electronics for inventors” 4th edition, McGraw-Hill
Education, 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE108 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course provides computer architecture, instruction set design, memory organization,
ALU operations, I/O interfaces and multi computing systems.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To provide an introduction to concepts in computer architecture.
2. Impart knowledge on design aspects, system resources such as memory technology and I/O
subsystems needed to achieve increase in performance.
3. Acquaint the students with current trends in computing architecture.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS 9 hours


Introduction to computer abstractions and technology, CPU performance, the power wall, Switch from
uniprocessors to multiprocessors.

UNIT II INSTRUCTIONS 9 hours


instructions, Logical operations, Instructions for making decisions, Supporting procedures in
computer hardware, Communicating with people, MIPS architecture and instruction set.

UNIT III PIPELINE ARCHITECTURES 9 hours


Logic design conventions, data path design, a simple implementation scheme, Control hardware,
Pipelining overview, Pipelined data-path and control.

UNIT IV ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS 9 hours


Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division, Floating point arithmetic, Parallelism and Computer
Arithmetic, Floating point in the x86, Forwarding versus stalling, Control hazards, Exceptions,
Branch prediction.

UNIT V MEMORY ORGANIZATIONS & MULTI-PROCESSORS 9 hours


Introduction to memory organization, Basics of caches, cache performance, Virtual memory,
Introduction to Storage, Dependability reliability and Availability, Disk storage, Flash storage,
Connecting processors memory and I/O devices, Interfacing I/O devices, Introduction to multicores
,multi-processors and clusters, Creating parallel processing programs, Shared memory
multiprocessors, Clusters and other message passing multiprocessors, Hardware multi-threading,
SISD, MIMD,SIMD,SPMD, Vector.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Acquire basic knowledge on the operation of semiconductor devices like p-n junctions, Zener
diodes.
2. Compare the operation of BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs
3. Design various circuits using p-n junctions, Zener diodes, BJTs and MOSFETs.
4. Understand the Principle of operation differential amplifier.
5. Obtain the applications of operation differential amplifier.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Text Book(s)
1. Patterson, D.A. & J.L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design, Elsevier, 4th ed.,2009.

2. William Stallings, Computer Organisation & Architecture, Pearson, 8th ed., 2010.

Reference Books
1. Patterson, D.A. & J.L. Hennessy Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach,5th Edition,
2012.
2. Hamacher et. al, Computer Organisation, McGraw Hill, 5th ed., 2002.

3. Samir Palnitkar, Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, Pearson.

4. M.Moris Mano ,Computer Systems Architecture , 3rd Edition,Pearson/PHI.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE109 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course facilitates the students to familiar with Advanced Microprocessors and its applications.
Course covers the Introduction to the Intel 80186/80188, Programming the 80186/8018, Introduction
to the 80286, 80386 & 80486. The course also includes the advanced Pentium processors introductions
and Pentium Pro introductions.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study the Architecture of 80186/80188 Microprocessor.
2. Study the addressing modes and instruction set of 80186/80188.
3. Know the architecture of 80286, 80386 & 80486
4. Understand Superscalar Architecture and advanced instruction sets of Pentium
Microprocessor
5. Study the Special Pentium Pro Features and applications

UNIT I 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9 hours


The 8086 Microprocessor: Introduction to 8086 – Microprocessor architecture – Addressing modes
– Instruction set and assembler directives – Assembly language programming.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO THE INTEL 80186/80188 9 hours


80186/80188 Architecture, Versions of the 80186/80188, 80186 Basic Block Diagram, 80186/80188
Basic Features, 80186/80188 Timing diagram.

UNIT III PROGRAMMING THE 80186/80188 9 hours


Enhancements, Peripheral Control Block, Interrupts in the 80186/80188, DMA Controller, Chip
Selection Unit.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO THE 80286, 80386 & 80486 9 hours


Hardware Features, Additional Instructions, the Virtual Memory Machine, The 80386 and 80486
Microprocessors, introduction to the 80386 microprocessor, the memory system, the input/output
system, memory and i/0 control signals, special 80386 registers, debug and test registers, 80386
memory management, descriptors and selectors, the task state segment (tss), moving to protected
mode, virtual 8086 mode, the memory paging mechanism, the page directory, Basic 80486
Architecture, 80486 Memory System.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO THE PENTIUM MICROPROCESSOR 9 hours


The Memory System, Input/Output System, System Timing, Superscalar Architecture, SPECIAL
Pentium Registers, Pentium Memory Management, New Pentium Instructions. Internal Structure of
the Pentium Pro, Pin Connections, the Memory System, System Timing, Special Pentium Pro
Features and applications.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to

1. Explain the Architecture of 80186/80188 Microprocessor.


2. Describe the addressing modes and instruction set of 80186/80188.
3. Explain the architecture of 80286, 80386 & 80486
4. Clarify the Superscalar Architecture and advanced instruction sets of Pentium Microprocessor
5. Illuminate the Special Pentium Pro Features and applications.

Text Book(s)
1. Barry B.Brey, The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80, 86, 80286, 80386 80486, Pentium,
Pentium Pro Processor, Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium 4, Architecture, Programming and
interfacing, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
2. John Peatman, Design with Microcontroller McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi.

Reference Books
1. Alan Clements, “The principles of computer Hardware”, Oxford University Press, 4th Edition,
2006.
2. Rajkamal, The concepts and feature of micro controllers 68HC11, 8051 and 8096; S Chand
Publishers, New Delhi. 2005

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE110 MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING WITH TI- MSP 430
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course introduces the concept of embedded system and gives introduction to the students about
the Texas Instruments MSP430 architecture, interfacing techniques, peripheral details and communication
model of the Texas Instruments MSP430.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the basic of MSP430.
2. Study the Architecture of the MSP430 Processor, different instruction sets.
3. Know the port programming and interfacing techniques.
4. Understand the timer and counter of MSP 430.
5. Study the different communication buses used.

UNIT I THE TEXAS INSTRUMENTS MSP430 9 hours


What (and Where) Are Embedded Systems? Approaches to Embedded Systems, Small
Microcontrollers, Anatomy of a Typical Small Microcontroller, Memory, Software, Where Does the
MSP430 Fit? The Outside View—Pin-Out, The Inside View—Functional Block Diagram, Memory,
Central Processing Unit, Memory-Mapped Input and Output Clock Generator, Exceptions: Interrupts
and Resets, Where to Find Further Information.

UNIT II ARCHITECTURE OF THE MSP430 PROCESSOR 9 hours


Central Processing Unit, Addressing Modes, Constant Generator and Emulated Instructions,
Instruction Set, Examples Reflections on the CPU and Instruction Set, Resets, Clock System,
Functions, Interrupts, and Low-Power Modes, Functions and Subroutines, Storage for Local
Variables, Passing Parameters to a Subroutine and Returning a Result, Mixing C and Assembly
Language, Interrupts- Interrupt Service Routines, Issues Associated with Interrupts, Low-Power
Modes of Operation.

UNIT III PORT PROGRAMMING 9 hours


Digital Input and Output: Parallel Ports, Digital Inputs, Switch De-bounce, Digital Outputs, Interface
between 3V and 5V Systems, Driving Heavier Loads, Liquid Crystal Displays, Driving an LCD from
an MSP430x4xx, Simple Applications of the LCD.

UNIT IV WATCHDOG TIMER 9 hours


Basic Timer1, Timer-A, Measurement in the Capture Mode, Output in the Continuous Mode, Output
in the Up Mode: Edge-Aligned Pulse-Width Modulation, Output in the Up/Down Mode: Centered
Pulse-Width Modulation, Operation of Timer-A in the Sampling Mode.

UNIT V COMMUNICATIONS WITH MSP-430 9 hours


Analog-to-Digital Conversion: General Issues, Analog-to-Digital Conversion: Successive
Approximation, the ADC10 Successive-Approximation ADC9.5 Basic Operation of the ADC10,
Digital-to-Analog Conversion, Serial Peripheral Interface, SPI with the USI, SPI with the USCI, A
Simple I²C Master with the USCI_B0 on a FG4618.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Demonstrate the basic of MSP430.
2. Explain the components of MSP430 Processor architecture and different instruction sets.
3. Design the port programming and interfacing techniques.
4. Design the timer and counter for various modulation schemes of MSP 430.
5. Explain the different communication buses used in MSP430.

Text Book(s)
1. Introduction to Embedded Systems- K V Shibu , McGraw Hill-2007.

2. MSP430 Microcontroller Basics - John Davies, Elsevier, 2008.

Reference Books
1. Embedded Systems Design Using the TI MSP430 Series, 1st Edition - Chris Nagy, Elsevier,
2003.
2. Analog and Digital Circuits for Electronic Control System Applications-Using the TI

3. MSP430 Microcontroller- Jerry Luecke, Elsevier, 2004.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE111 ARM – SYSTEM ON CHIP ARCHITECTURE
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course gives introduction to the students to understand the Texas Instruments MSP430 architecture,
interfacing techniques, peripheral details and communication model of the Texas Instruments MSP430.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Study the basic of ARM processor.
2. Know the different instruction sets and pipelining
3. Study the advanced instruction sets.
4. Understand the ARM programming and interfacing techniques.
5. Know the different ARM Processor cores.

UNIT I AN INTRODUCTION TO ARM PROCESSOR 9 hours


Processor architecture and organization, Abstraction in hardware design, MU0 - a simple processor,
Instruction set design, Processor design trade-offs, The Reduced Instruction Set Computer, The
Acorn RISC Machine, Architectural inheritance, The ARM programmer's model, ARM
development tools.

UNIT II ARM ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING 9 hours


Data processing instructions, Data transfer instructions, Control flow instructions, 3-Stage pipeline
ARM organization, 5-stage pipeline ARM organization, ARM instruction execution, ARM
implementation, The ARM coprocessor interface.

UNIT III ARM INSTRUCTION SETS 9 hours


Introduction, Exceptions, Conditional execution, Branch and Branch with Link (B, BL), Branch,
Branch with Link and eXchange (BX, BLX), Software Interrupt (SWI), Data processing instructions,
Multiply instructions, Count leading zeros (CLZ - architecture v5T only), Single word and unsigned
byte data transfer instructions, Half-word and signed byte data transfer instructions, Multiple register
transfer instructions, Swap memory and register instructions (SWP), Status register to general register
transfer instructions, General register to status register transfer instructions.

UNIT IV THUMB INSTRUCTION SETS 9 hours


Abstraction in software design, Data types, Floating-point data types, The ARM floating-point
architecture, Expressions, Conditional statements, Loops, Functions and procedures, The Thumb bit
in the CPSR, The Thumb programmer's model, Thumb branch instructions, Thumb software interrupt
instruction, Thumb data processing instructions, Thumb single register data transfer instructions,
Thumb multiple register data transfer instructions, Thumb breakpoint instruction.

UNIT V ARM PROCESSOR CORES 9 hours


ARM7TDMI, ARM8 256, ARM9TDMI 260, ARM10TDMI 263.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to

1. Explain the basic of ARM processor.


2. Describe the different instruction sets and pipelining.
3. Design the ARM programming and interfacing techniques.
4. Describe the advanced instruction sets.
5. Explain the different ARM Processor cores.

Text Book(s)
1. Michael J. Flynn and Wayne Luk, “Computer System Design System-on-Chip”, Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd.
2. Steve Furber, “ARM System on Chip Architecture “, 2nd Edition, 2000, Addison Wesley
Professional.
Reference Books
1. Ricardo Reis, “Design of System on a Chip: Devices and Components”, 1st Edition, 2004,
Springer
2. Jason Andrews, “Co-Verification of Hardware and Software for ARM System on Chip Design
(Embedded Technology)”, Newnes, BK and CDROM.
3. Prakash Rashinkar, Peter Paterson and Leena Singh L, “System on Chip Verification –
Methodologies and Techniques”, 2001, Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Minor
20MDECE202 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
Pre-requisite None

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. To understand the different types of instruction sets, addressing modes of 8086
2. To study the architecture of MSP-430.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Part A : 8086 Microprocessor Programs using NASM/8086 microprocessor kit.
1. Introduction to MASM Programming.
2. Programs using arithmetic and logical operations
3. Programs using string operations and Instruction prefix: Move Block, Reverse string,
Sorting, String comparison
4. Programs for code conversion
5. Multiplication and Division programs
Part B: Embedded C Experiments using MSP430 Microcontroller
1. Interfacing and programming GPIO ports in C using MSP430 (blinking LEDs, push buttons)
2. Usage of Low Power Modes: ( Use MSPEXP430FR5969 as hardware platform and demonstrate
the low power modes and measure the active mode and standby mode current)
3. Interrupt programming examples through GPIOs
4. PWM generation using Timer on MSP430 GPIO
5. Interfacing potentiometer with MSP430
6. PWM based Speed Control of Motor controlled by potentiometer connected to MSP430
GPIO
7. Using ULP advisor in Code Composer Studio on MSP430

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Program the MSP430 for various applications
2. Design a embedded system for particular application using MSP430

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors in Electronics & Communication Engineering


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors
20HDECE101 NEURAL NETWORK AND FUZZY LOGIC
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course enables the students to understand the concepts of neural networks, single layer, and
multilayer neural networks. Also it covers the usage of Fuzzy logic techniques.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the introduction of neural networks
2. Study the single layer feed-forward layer.
3. Study the multilayer feed-forward layer.
4. Understand the fuzzy logic techniques and it applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS 9 hours


Introduction, Humans and Computers, Organization of the Brain, Biological Neuron, Biological and
Artificial Neuron Models, Hodgkin-Huxley Neuron Model, Integrate-and-Fire Neuron Model,
Spiking Neuron Model, Characteristics of ANN, McCulloch-Pitts Model, Historical Developments,
Potential Applications of ANN.

UNIT II SINGLE LAYER FEED FORWARD NEURAL NETWORKS 9 hours

Introduction, Perceptron Models: Discrete, Continuous and Multi-Category, Training Algorithms:


Discrete and Continuous Perceptron Networks, Perceptron Convergence theorem, Limitations of the
Perceptron Model, Applications.

UNIT III MULTILAYER FEED FORWARD NEURAL NETWORKS 9 hours


Credit Assignment Problem, Generalized Delta Rule, Derivation of Backpropagation (BP) Training,
Summary of Backpropagation Algorithm, Kolmogorov Theorem, Learning Difficulties and
Improvements.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC 9 hours


Basic concepts of fuzzy set theory – operations of fuzzy sets – properties of fuzzy sets – Crisp relations
– Fuzzy relational equations – operations on fuzzy relations – fuzzy systems – propositional logic –
Inference – Predicate Logic – Inference in predicate logic – fuzzy logic principles – fuzzy quantifiers
– fuzzy inference – fuzzy rule-based systems – fuzzification and defuzzification – types.

UNIT V FUZZY LOGIC APPLICATIONS 9 hours


Fuzzy logic controllers – principles – review of control systems theory – various industrial
applications of FLC adaptive fuzzy systems – fuzzy decision making – Multiobjective decision
making – fuzzy classification – means clustering – fuzzy pattern recognition – image processing
applications – syntactic recognition – fuzzy optimization.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Recognise the introduction of neural networks
2. Design the single layer feed-forward layer.
3. Design the multilayer feed-forward layer.
4. Describe the fuzzy logic techniques.
5. Demonstrate the applications of fuzzy logic techniques
Text Book(s)
1. Freeman, James A., and David M. Skapura. Neural networks: algorithms, applications, and
programming techniques. Addison Wesley Longman Publishing Co., Inc., 1991.
2. Fausett, Laurene V. Fundamentals of neural networks: architectures, algorithms and
applications. Pearson Education India, 2006.
Reference Books
1. Haykin, Simon S. "Neural networks and learning machines/Simon Haykin." (2009).

2. Rajasekaran, Sanguthevar, and GA Vijayalakshmi Pai. Neural networks, fuzzy logic and genetic
algorithm: synthesis and applications (with cd). PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2003.
3. Klir, George, and Bo Yuan. Fuzzy sets and fuzzy logic. New Jersey: Prentice hall, 1995.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors
20HDECE102 TESTING OF DIGITAL VLSI CIRCUITS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite 20ECE102, 20ECE111

Course Description:

Testing is one of the most expensive process in the design flow of a typical chip. There exists various
errors e.g. design errors, fabrication defects, fabrication errors and physical failures. This course
covers: Introduction to Testing, Test methods and Design for Testability
Course Objectives:

This course enables students to


1. To know the different types of faults and to study fault detection
2. To understand the concepts of test generation - DFT and BIST.
3. To study in detail about fault diagnosis, memory testing and PLA testing

UNIT I TESTING AND FAULT MODELING 9 hours


Introduction to testing - Faults in Digital circuits - Modeling of faults - Logical fault models - Fault
detection - Fault location - Fault equivalence - Fault dominance, Logic simulation - Types of
Simulation - Compiled code simulation - Gate level event driven simulation - Delay models

UNIT II TEST GENERATION 9 hours


Test generation for combinational circuits - Truth table and fault matrix method – Path sensitization
algorithm - Boolean difference method - D – algorithm - PODEM algorithm - FAN algorithm ,
Testable combinational logic circuit design, Test generation for sequential circuits - Time frame
expansion - Test generation based on circuit structure and state table.

UNIT III LOGIC BUILT-IN-SELF-TEST 9 hours


Test pattern generators - Exhaustive testing - Pseudo random testing - Pseudo exhaustive testing,
Output response compression techniques - ones count - transition count – parity check - syndrome
check - signature analysis, BIST architectures - Built-in-Evaluation and Self Test (BEST) - Self
Testing Using MISR and Parallel SRSG (STUMPS) - Built In Logic Block Observer (BILBO) -
Modified BILBO

UNIT IV DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY AND MEMORY TESTING 9 hours


Testability - Controllability and Observability, Adhoc Design for testability techniques, Generic Scan based
designs - Full serial integrated scan - Isolated serial scan - Non- serial scan, Boundary scan architecture. Testing
of RAM - RAM functional fault models - Test algorithms - Test generation for Embedded RAM

UNIT V FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND PLA TESTING 9 hours


Diagnosis by UUT reduction, Combinational logic diagnosis - Cause-Effect analysis - Effect-Cause analysis,
Self-checking design, PLA Testing
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Demonstrate different types of fault models and fault simulation.
2. Acquire complete knowledge regarding test generation for combinational circuits and
sequential circuits.
3. Demonstrate the concepts of BIST and their architectures.
4. Illustrate the concepts of DFT and memory testing.
5. Identify the fault location by diagnosis methods and design self checking circuits..

Text Book(s)
1. Laung-Terng Wang, Cheng-Wen Wu, Xiaoqing Wen, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures: Design
for Testability", Morgan Kaufmann publishers, 2006.
2. M.L.Bushnell and V.D.Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed-
Signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Internal Mid Examinations, External End Examination.


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors
20HDECE103 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
This course emphasize to the students to understand the concepts of real time operating systems (RTOS).
This course covers the different types of policies, multi-resource services and give embedded system
components. It also covers the High availability and Reliability Design.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the introduction of real-time embedded systems
2. Know the different types of policies.
3. Understand the Multi-resource Services techniques.
4. Learn the Embedded System Components.
5. Know the embedded system design based on availability and reliability.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO REAL-TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9 hours


Brief history of Real Time Systems, A brief history of Embedded Systems. Resource Analysis, Real-
Time Service Utility, Scheduling Classes, The Cyclic Executive, Scheduler Concepts, Preemptive
Fixed Priority Scheduling Policies, Real-Time OS, Thread Safe Reentrant Functions.

UNIT II RTOS POLICIES 9 hours

Preemptive Fixed-Priority Policy, Feasibility, Rate Monotonic least upper bound, Necessary and
Sufficient feasibility, Deadline – Monotonic Policy, Dynamic priority policies.
I/O Resources: Worst-case Execution time, Intermediate I/O, Execution efficiency, I/O Architecture.
Memory: Physical hierarchy, Capacity and allocation, Shared Memory, ECC Memory, Flash file
systems.

UNIT III MULTI-RESOURCE SERVICES 9 hours


Blocking, Deadlock and livestock, Critical sections to protect shared resources, priority inversion.
Soft Real-Time Services: Missed Deadlines, QoS, Alternatives to rate monotonic policy, mixed hard
and soft real-time services.

UNIT IV EMBEDDED SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9 hours


Firmware components, RTOS system software mechanisms, Software application components.
Debugging Components- Exceptions assert, Checking return codes, Single-step debugging, kernel
scheduler traces, Test access ports, Trace ports, Power-On self-test and diagnostics, External test
equipment, Application-level debugging. Basic concepts of drill-down tuning, hardware – supported
profiling and tracing, Building performance monitoring into software, Path length, Efficiency, and
Call frequency, Fundamental optimizations.

UNIT V HIGH AVAILABILITY AND RELIABILITY DESIGN 9 hours


Reliability and Availability, Similarities and differences, Reliability, Reliable software, Available
software, Design tradeoffs, Hierarchical applications for Fail-safe design. Design of RTOS – PIC
microcontroller.
Course Outcomes:
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to


1. Introduce real-time embedded systems
2. Describe the different types of policies.
3. Demonstrate the Multi-resource Services techniques.
4. Explain the Embedded System Components.
5. Explain the embedded system design based on availability and reliability.

Text Book(s)
1. C.M. Krishna and G.Shin, Real Time Systems, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2017.

2. Jean J Labrosse, Embedded Systems Building Blocks Complete and Ready-to-use Modules in C,
CMP books, 2/e, 1999. (reprint 2011

Reference Books
1. Jean J Labrosse, Micro C/OS-II, The Real Time Kernel, CMP Books, 2011.

2. Sam Siewert, V, Real-Time Embedded Components and Systems: With Linux and RTOS
(Engineering), 2015.

3. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, 4th edition, Pearson Edition, 2015.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors
20HDECE104 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
Discrete random process, autocorrelation, autovaiance of the discrete random signal has been covered
in the course. The spectrum estimation, linear estimation design included in the course. Also, filter
design using adaptive techniques and multi-rate signal processing have been discussed.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the discrete random signal processing.
2. Study the spectrum estimation.
3. Understand the linear estimation and prediction.
4. Know the designing of adaptive filter.
5. Study the multi-rate signal processing.

UNIT I DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING 9 hours


Discrete Random Processes- Ensemble averages, stationary processes, Autocorrelation and
Autocovariance matrices. Parseval's Theorem, Wiener-Khintchine Relation- Power Spectral Density
Periodogram, Spectral Factorization, Filtering random processes. Low Pass Filtering of White Noise.
Parameter estimation: Bias and consistency.

UNIT II SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 9 hours

Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals, Non-Parametric Methods-Correlation Method,


Periodogram Estimator, Performance Analysis of Estimators -Unbiased, Consistent Estimators-
Modified periodogram, Bartlett and Welch methods, Blackman –Tukey method. Parametric Methods
- AR, MA, ARMA model based spectral estimation. Parameter Estimation -Yule-Walker equations,
solutions using Durbin’s algorithm.

UNIT III LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION 9 hours


Linear prediction- Forward and backward predictions, Solutions of the Normal equations- Levinson
Durbin algorithms. Least mean squared error criterion -Wiener filter for filtering and prediction, FIR
Wiener filter and Wiener IIR filters, Discrete Kalman filter.

UNIT IV ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9 hours


FIR adaptive filters -adaptive filter based on steepest descent method-Widrow-Hoff LMS adaptive
algorithm, Normalized LMS. Adaptive channel equalization-Adaptive echo cancellation-Adaptive
noise cancellation- Adaptive recursive filters (IIR). RLS adaptive filters-Exponentially weighted RLS-
sliding window RLS.

UNIT V MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 9 hours


Mathematical description of change of sampling rate - Interpolation and Decimation, Decimation by
an integer factor - Interpolation by an integer factor, Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor,
Filter implementation for sampling rate conversion- Direct form FIR structures, Polyphase filter
structures, time-variant structures. Multistage implementation of multirate system. Application to
sub band coding - Wavelet transform and filter bank implementation of wavelet expansion of
signals.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Recognise the discrete random signal processing.
2. Demonstrate different spectrum estimation techniques.
3. Realize the linear estimation and prediction.
4. Design the adaptive filter.
5. Analyse the multi-rate signal processing.
Text Book(s)
1. Monson H.Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, John Wiley and
Sons,Inc.,Singapore, 2002.

Reference Books
1. John G.Proakis, Dimitris G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Pearson Education, 2002.

2. John G.Proakis et.al.,’Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing’, Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Dimitris G. Manolakis et.al.,’Statistical and adaptive signal Processing’, McGraw Hill,


Newyork,2000.
4. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson Education, Inc.,
Second Edition, 2004.( For Wavelet Transform Topic)

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors
20HDECE105 SYSTEM ON CHIP DESIGN
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
The system architecture, hardware & software design will be covered using SOC approach. The
different processors, memory design for SOC will be covered. Also, the case studies of various
applications will be included.
Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the introduction of SOC
2. Know the different types of processors.
3. Understand the memory design of SOC.
4. Learn the interconnect and customization.
5. Know the Application of SOC

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 hours


System Architecture, Components of the system, Hardware & Software, Processor Architectures,
Memory and Addressing. System level interconnection, An approach for SOC Design, System
Architecture and Complexity.

UNIT II PROCESSORS 9 hours


Introduction, Processor Selection for SOC, Basic concepts in Processor Architecture, Basic concepts
in Processor Micro Architecture, Basic elements in Instruction handling. Buffers: minimizing Pipeline
Delays, Branches, More Robust Processors, Vector Processors and Vector Instructions extensions,
VLIW Processors, Superscalar Processors.

UNIT III MEMORY DESIGN FOR SOC 9 hours


Overview of SOC external memory, Internal Memory, Size, Scratchpads and Cache memory, Cache
Organization, Cache data, Write Policies, Strategies for line replacement at miss time, Types of Cache,
Split – I, and D – Caches, Multilevel Caches, Virtual to real translation, SOC Memory System, Models
of Simple Processor – memory interaction.

UNIT IV INTERCONNECT CUSTOMIZATION AND 9 hours


CONFIGURATION
Inter Connect Architectures, Bus: Basic Architectures, SOC Standard Buses, Analytic Bus Models,
Using the Bus model, Effects of Bus transactions and contention time. SOC Customization: An
overview, Customizing Instruction Processor, Reconfiguration Technologies, Mapping design onto
Reconfigurable devices, Instance Specific design, Customizable Soft Processor, Reconfiguration –
overhead analysis and trade-off analysis on reconfigurable Parallelism.

UNIT V APPLICATION STUDIES / CASE STUDIES 9 hours


SOC Design approach, AES algorithms, Design and evaluation, Image compression – JPEG
compression.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the introduction of SOC
2. Know the different types of processors.
3. Understand the memory design of SOC.
4. Learn the interconnect and customization.
5. Know the Application of SOC
Text Book(s)
1. Michael J. Flynn, Wayne Luk, Computer System Design: System on chip, Wiley-Blackwell, First
Edition, 2011.
2. Steve Furber, “ARM System on Chip Architecture “, 2nd Edition, 2000, Addison Wesley
Professional.
Reference Books
1. Ricardo Reis, “Design of System on a Chip: Devices and Components”, 1st Edition, 2004,
Springer
2. Jason Andrews, “Co-Verification of Hardware and Software for ARM System on Chip Design
(Embedded Technology)”, Newnes, BK and CDROM.
3. Prakash Rashinkar, Peter Paterson and Leena Singh L, “System on Chip Verification –
Methodologies and Techniques”, 2001, Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination


Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Honors
20HDECE106 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite None

Course Description:
The signal processing design has been covered with VLSI approach. The retiming, folding and
unfolding techniques have been covered in the course. Also, programmable DSP covered in the course.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Understand the introduction of DSP systems
2. Know the different types retiming techniques.
3. Understand the fast convolution.
4. Learn the bit level arithmetic circuits.
5. Know the programmable DSP.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DSP SYSTEMS 9 hours


Introduction To DSP Systems -Typical DSP algorithms; Iteration Bound – data flow graph
representations ,loop bound and iteration bound, Longest path Matrix algorithm; Pipelining and
parallel processing –Pipelining of FIR digital filters, parallel processing, pipelining and parallel
processing for low power.

UNIT II RETIMING, FOLDING AND UNFOLDING 9 hours


Retiming - definitions and properties Retiming techniques; Unfolding – an algorithm for Unfolding,
properties of unfolding, sample period reduction and parallel processing application; Folding –
Folding transformation – Register minimizing techniques – Register minimization in folded
architectures.

UNIT III FAST CONVOLUTION 9 hours


Fast convolution – Cook-Toom algorithm, modified Cook-Took algorithm – Winograd Algorithm,
Iterated Convolution – Cyclic Convolution; Pipelined and parallel recursive and adaptive filters –
inefficient/efficient single channel interleaving, Look- Ahead pipelining in first- order IIR filters, Look
Ahead pipelining with power-of-two decomposition parallel processing of IIR filters, combined
pipelining and parallel processing of IIR filters, pipelined adaptive digital filters, relaxed look-ahead,
pipelined LMS adaptive filter.

UNIT IV BIT-LEVEL ARITHMETIC ARCHITECTURES 9 hours


Bit-Level Arithmetic Architectures- parallel multipliers with sign extension, parallel carry-ripple array
multipliers, parallel carry-save multiplier, 4x 4 bit Baugh- Wooley carry-save multiplication tabular
form and implementation, design of Lyon’s bit-serial multipliers using Horner’s rule, bit-serial FIR
filter, CSD representation, CSD multiplication using Horner’s rule for precision improvement.

UNIT V PROGRAMMING DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 9 hours


Synchronous, Wave and asynchronous pipelining- synchronous pipelining and clocking styles, clock
skew in edge-triggered single-phase clocking, two-phase clocking, wave pipelining, asynchronous
pipelining bundled data versus dual rail protocol; Programming Digital Signal Processors – general
architecture with important features; Low power Design – needs for low power VLSI chips, charging
and discharging capacitance, short-circuit current of an inverter, CMOS leakage current, basic
principles of low power design.
Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the introduction of DSP systems
2. Know the different types retiming techniques.
3. Understand the fast convolution.
4. Learn the bit level arithmetic circuits.
5. Know the programmable DSP.
Text Book(s)
1. Keshab K.Parhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing systems, Design and implementation”,
Wiley, Inter Science, 1999.

Reference Books
1. Gary Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1998.

2. Mohammed Isamail and Terri Fiez, “Analog VLSI Signal and Information Processing”, Mc
Graw-Hill, 1994.
3. S.Y. Kung, H.J. White House, T. Kailath, “VLSI and Modern Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall,
1985.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination

You might also like